Home

Ariens 924049 Snow Blower User Manual

1. To Arm The System 000006 To Disarm The System 0 0 B Illuminated Entry System 0 0 0 ll Remote Keyless Entry RKE To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate To Lock The Doors And Liftgate Using The Panic Alarm 0 24 Express Down Window Feature 25 Programming Additional Transmitters 25 Transmitter Battery Service 25 General Information lisse 26 ll Remote Starting System If Equipped 27 How To Use Remote Start lus 27 la Door Locks 265 c RR eee eae hg eee 28 Manual Door Locks 000000 28 Power Door Locks 00000040 30 Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors llle 32 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se la Windows sies re E RSRY TEE ERA 34 Power Windows kesedan Pen 34 Wind Buffeting scele el re nne 37 bucc PETI 38 B Occupant Restraints sess euo Rr er e 39 Lap Shoulder Belts llle 41 Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure 47 Seat Belt Pretensioners 2 0 47 Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System BeltAlert8 eae pranie a 48 Automatic Locking Mode 49 Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
2. 331 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 159 Electronic Stability Program ESP 216 332 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light 211 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 221 Emergency In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck Hazard Warning Flasher Jacking Jump Starting Overheating Towing Emission Control System Maintenance Engine 502 INDEX eee Air Cleaner uos e DERE YE 429 Block Heater lees 311 Break In Recommendations 77 Checking Oil Level 000 424 Conipartmernt 2 aces each d e Re ORT OR 418 Coolant Antifreeze sells 440 474 Cooling aig vk e erre docs me ap E Rr RR a d 440 Exhaust Gas Caution 39 279 372 Fails to Start 2 ee ee 310 Flooded Starting 204 ads ein mn 310 Fuel Requirements restare sdice nara Gaata 368 Jump Starting serie ok e 407 cl 424 472 474 Oil Change Interval 210 225 426 Oil Filler Cap 0 0 418 419 420 427 OIL FIET uode uber aed een ta a ead 428 Oil Filter Disposal llle 428 Oil Selecti n ras A eee Aa YE a4 426 472 Oil Synthetic isses see o mn 427 Operation ansas ste re Ro s UR cente Yoga d d 77 Overheating echan eU ed ae ee 394 Starting s seio sane S had eo iuepR Eex e RS 307 Temperature Gauge srece recreere petasses 205 Engine Qil Viscosity ia s docs retecasa kans 427 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 61 Entr
3. 153 156 438 Washing Vehicle s cps 2 0 2 0 2c ee eee 452 Water Driving Through 00000 321 Wheel Alignment and Balance 354 Wheel and Wheel Trim ccc cite predvies sees 454 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 454 en INDEX 519 Wheel Bearings 22 4 sve cre ee EE cee ee es ne 451 Wheel Nut Torque 406 Wind Buffeting ese RE Re Rn 37 173 Window Airbag Side Curtain 52 58 Window Fogging 0 0 cece ee asas 300 WindOWS srede et Sdn arc Up Bee oed 34 POWEL x scrape aree BUR RRS np RS 34 Windows Express Down i e 25 Windshield Defroster Lun 80 286 287 Windshield Washers LL 153 156 Fluid nirea eaae ior Race ere ep RU cen en 438 Windshield Wiper Blades 437 Windshield Wipers 0 0 00000 0c ee eee 153 Wiper Blade Replacement 437 438 Wiper Delay ie essc pn ke SOROR RR d 155 Wiper Rear 2a 544 ae ke e e eed 193 Wipers Intermittent i csc meadd at isa eii s ane 155 Wrecker TOWING 5 ecis cado m reb ee et nari 412 YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure 455 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained person nel The following must be observed during inst
4. MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emission system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor nia reformulated gasoline EN STARTING AND OPERATING 371 Materials Added to Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition mal functions ca
5. Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 819402e4 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s Zero call one cancel two confirmation prompts three continue four delete five dial six download seven edit eight emergency nine English star erase all plus Espanol pound Francais add location all home help ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s language return to main menu return or main menu list names select phone select list phones send mobile set up phone settings or phone mute set up mute off towing assistance new entry transfer call no UConnect Tutorial pager try again pair a phone voice training phone pairing pairing work phonebook phone book yes previous record again redial 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesir
6. 0005 369 Refrigerant asusa sagin ERRAT das 434 Release Hood 0 0 cee eee eee 144 Reminder Lights On 0 00000 sna 148 Reminder Seat Belt Remote Control Starting System ee 27 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 20 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 282 Remote Starting System 000 27 Replacement Bulbs s vanessa e me 465 Replacement Keys iex cake awa ah ake rr a 16 Replacement Parts 2 5 b ees 423 Replacement Tires llle 352 Reporting Safety Defects 040 491 Resetting Oil Change Indicator 210 225 Restraint Head 0 1 ee eee 130 Restraints Child llle 65 Restraints Occupant 00000004 39 Retractable Cargo Area Cover 04 191 Reverse Lights 6 0 6 468 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck 410 Roof Rack Luggage Rack 196 en INDEX 513 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 80 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 81 Safety Defects Reporting 4 491 Safety Exhaust Gas 00 0000 00 39 79 Safety Information Tire 337 Safety TIPS ac twa etene na fae PE Yu ald 78 Satellite Radio 234 235 266 267 271 276 Satellite Radio Antenna 0 272 Schedule Maintenance lees 478 Seat Belt Maintenance 005 457 Seat Belt Reminder 0 00040 48
7. 311 AutoStick General Information 318 lll All Wheel Drive AWD If Equipped 319 Wi Automatic Transaxle 0 00004 276 304 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN Bl Driving On Slippery Surfaces 320 Electronic Stability Program ESP 332 Acceleration 4 sunt ERR a A RR ans 320 ESP BAS Warning Light And ESP TCS Traction ciis eee 320 AAEM pr ptsie ath pdurdee ipis tete ae Bl Driving Through Water 5 321 BYE SNO CONBCLITOE qus enantio 9o Flowing Rising Water E 31 Mi Power Steering 22 ns 336 W Parking Brake esee qup ately TGA ke c ie bienes debis d B Drake Syste e csse X 3O cedo ERO e 326 ioc a nudes eese d Anti Lock Brake System ABS 327 aai LL LE ja Wi Electronic Brake Control System 328 Bites Cone TOR BOR dut idi i Anti Lock Brake System ABS 328 Tire Pressure xu taea cesa cere EEA 345 Brake Assist System BAS serrer arian 330 Hiire Chains 0 2 eee 355 Traction Control System TCS 00 331 MSnow Tires 0 0 eee 355 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 331 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 305 H Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS Replacement Parisienses srasni ea pa ne 367
8. Towing Tips Automatic Transaxle The DRIVE range can be selected when towing How ever if frequent shifting occurs while in this range select the 3 range for 4 speed automatic or the 5 range for 6 speed automatic NOTE Using the 3 or 5 range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transaxle life by reducing exces sive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation then change the auto matic transaxle fluid and filter according to the interval specified for police taxi fleet or frequent trailer tow ing in the Maintenance Schedule ee STARTING AND OPERATING 391 NOTE Check the 4 speed automatic transaxle fluid level before towing The 6 speed transaxle is sealed and the fluid level cannot be checked See your authorized dealer for assistance Towing Tips Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Don t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Towing Tips Autostick If Equipped Byusing the Autostick modes and selecting a specific gear range frequent shifting can be a
9. 429 Air Conditioner Maintenance 433 Air Conditioning soc cc les 288 289 Air Conditioning Controls 288 289 Air Conditioning Filter ss 301 434 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 302 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 433 434 Air Conditioning System 288 289 293 433 Air Pressure Tires llle 213 346 Dun EL 50 Airbag Deployment 0040 56 60 Airbag Light llle 57 63 80 218 Airbag Maintenance 0 000 000 0000 62 Aitbag Side 0 056s tse m as 52 58 Airbag Window Side Curtain 52 58 Alarm Pane 3222234 34 tre Cae Phe EU ores 24 Alarm Security Alarm 18 208 Alarm System Security Alarm 18 Alignment and Balance 04 354 All Wheel Drive AWD seres 319 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 7 Antenna Satellite Radio less 272 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 441 442 472 Disposal 2322 b Rex PELA e 443 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 327 328 Anti Lock Warning Light 215 328 329 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 Anti Theft System llle 208 Appearance Care llle 452 Arming Theft System Security Alarm 18 Assistance Towing cesi 6 eee 106 en INDEX 497 Audio Systems Radio 234 266 Auto Down Power Windows 35 Auto Unlock
10. Beverage Cooler Storage Compartment en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 Press and release the button on the door to open it The large door swings upward to allow easy access to the compartment s contents Beverage Cooler Operation The blower speed setting on the climate control sets the rate at which air flows into the compartment The airflow control valve inside the compartment determines how much air flows into the compartment Turning the valve rearward increases the airflow turning it forward de creases the airflow and turning it all the way forward turns off the airflow fus Airflow Control Valve The compartment cools when the airflow control valve is open the engine is running and the Air Conditioning A C is on or the Automatic Temperature Control ATC system if equipped is set for automatic operation This allows you to cool the compartment when the climate control is in a cooling or heating mode 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME NOTE Whether operating a Manual Heating and A C system or operating an ATC system in a manual mode the A C indicator must be ON to cool the compartment Instrument Panel Storage Compartment If Equipped Press and release the button on the door to open it The door swings upward to allow easy access to the compart ment Instrument Panel Storage Compartment en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 Center Console Sto
11. Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM 458 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse e When installing the power module cover it is JA 40 Amp E Power Folding Seat important to ensure the cover is properly posi Green tioned and fully latched Failure to do so may J2 30 Amp m Transfer Case Module allow water to get into the TIPM and possibly Pink if equipped result in an electrical system failure Ja 30 Amp u Rear Door Module When replacing a blown fuse it is important to Pink use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating J4 25 Amp Driver Door Node The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated White may result in a dangerous electrical system over J5 25 Amp E Passenger Door Node load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it White indicates a problem in the circuit that must be Jo 40 Amp Anti Lock Brake Sys corrected Green E tem ABS Pump Electronic Stability Program ESP ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 459 Cartridge Mini wer Cartridge Mini D Cavity Puse Fuse Description Cavity Fuse Fuse Description J7 30 Amp Anti Lock Brake Sys J13 60 Amp E Ignition Off Draw Pink u tem ABS Valve Yellow IOD Main Electronic Stability J14 40 Amp Electric Back Light Program ESP Green EBL J8 40 Amp Power Memory Seat J15 30 Amp Rear Blower
12. e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every UConnect language change opera tion only the language specific 32 name phonebook is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect system is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the UConnect system will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico NOTE The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area The UConnect system does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell phone directly Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UConnect system to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the
13. 146 Automatic Headlights If Equipped 147 Headlights With Wipers Available With Auto Headlights Only 0000 147 Headlight Time Delay If Equipped 147 Daytime Running Lights DRL ItEquipped Leswiee nem d ROVS wth es 148 Lights On Reminder 148 Fog Lights If Equipped 148 T rn Signals vim ex DUREE eR 149 Highbeam Lowbeam Select Switch 150 en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 Flash To Pass i e em b RR e 150 To Set At A Desired Speed iius 160 Interior Lights er pike ee alka ears 151 To Deactivate iue ke edere e Re e Rn 160 ll Windshield Wipers And Washers 153 To Restime Speed seasc eai itemise pitts Intermittent Wiper System 155 To Vary The Speed Setting Mist Featur sicci amras a aa TERR dtd 155 To Accelerate For Passing Headlights With Wipers Available With Auto H Overhead Console nonna aana 162 kan a E IUDICI MEE e Courtesy Reading Lights 162 Windshield Washers 005 156 Sunglasses Storage es 163 QUIE Waer PIU iudicia qaddbisigbig d Interior Observation Mirror 163 m ea dd dii oo oes eta 157 Power Sunroof Switch If Equipped 163 li Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 159 W Garage Door Ope
14. ESN SID Access With REQ RES Radios With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the Tune Scroll control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the Tune Scroll control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen ESN SID Access With REN RER Radios While in SAT mode press the MENU button on the radio faceplate Next touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display ESN SID Access With REU Radio While in SAT mode press the MENU button on the radio faceplate Next turn the knob surrounding the joystick in the center of the radio to scroll to Subscription and then press and release the joystick All of the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display Selecting Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna if equipped Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger lug gage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273 as possib
15. ee STARTING AND OPERATING 313 4 Insert a screwdriver or similar small tool into the hole at the front of the cubby bin and push the manual override release lever forward 5 While holding the release lever forward move the shift lever from PARK to NEUTRAL 6 Release the manual override Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System This system prevents the key from being removed unless the shift lever is in PARK It also prevents shifting out of PARK unless the key is in the ON position and the brake pedal is applied 4 Speed or 6 Speed AutoStick Automatic Transaxle The electronically controlled transaxle provides a precise shift schedule The transaxle electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers m Shift Lever 314 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN Gear Ranges PARK PARK supplements the parking brake by locking the transaxle The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in motion Apply parking brake when leaving vehicle in this range When parking on a flat surface place the shift lever in the PARK position first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill it is important to set the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transaxle locking mechanism
16. 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations 276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect9 in Section 3 Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide SIRIUS BACKSEAT TV IF EQUIPPED Satellite video uses direct satellite receiver broadcasting technology to provide streaming video The subscription service provider is SIRIUS Satellite Radio SIRIUS Backseat TV offers three video channels for family entertainment directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE SIRIUS service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska Refer to your Video Entertainment System VES RER Navigation or REN Multimedia User Manual for detailed operating instructions VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM VES IF EQUIPPED The optional Video Entertainment System VES in cludes the following components for rear seat entertain ment e A diagonal 8 in 20 cm Liquid Crystal Display LCD screen integrated into the center overhead console The screen features brightness control for optimum daytime and nighttime viewing e The LCD Screen swings down from the console to allow the rear seat passenger s to view the display en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUM
17. All Systems For more detailed information about the climate controls in your vehicle refer to Single Zone Manual Air Condi tioning and Heating System Two and Three Zone Manual Air Conditioning and Heating Systems or Two and Three Zone Automatic Temperature Control ATC Systems General Climate Control Functions All Systems Blower Control Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the ventilation system in any mode Temperature Control Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the cabin UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285 Air Conditioning A C Control E Use this control to engage and disengage the A C NOTE e The A C compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds e If A C performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C condenser located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protec tors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance Mode Control Air Direction Use these controls to choose from several patterns of air distribution 286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEM e Panel 79 Airis directed through the outlets in the instrument panel For vehicles equipped with a three zone sys tem air is also directed through the outl
18. Fuses Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM 4 Engine Oil Dipstick 11 Air Cleaner Filter 5 Engine Oil Fill 12 Washer Fluid Bottle 6 Automatic Transaxle Dipstick 13 Engine Coolant Cap 7 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419 2 7L ENGINE COMPARTMENT AUS csse UM 81cda728 1 Coolant Bottle 7 Brake Fluid Reservoir 2 Coolant Pressure Cap 8 Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post 3 Power Steering Fluid 9 Remote Jump Start Negative Post 4 Engine Oil Fill 10 Fuses Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM 5 Engine Oil Dipstick 11 Air Cleaner Filter 6 Automatic Transaxle Dispstick 12 Washer Fluid Bottle 420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 3 5L ENGINE COMPARTMENT N Do Z ee m 81cda72c 1 Coolant Bottle 7 Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post 2 Coolant Pressure Cap 8 Remote Jump Start Negative Post 3 Power Steering Fluid 9 Fuses Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM 4 Engine Oil Fill 10 Air Cleaner Filter 5 Engine Oil Dipstick 11 Washer Fluid Bottle 6 Brake Fluid Reservoir ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transaxle control systems When these systems are oper
19. Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset e Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the RESET button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value e When the DTE value is less than 30 mi 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display e Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position e Units In The EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of m
20. ating properly your vehicle will provide excellent per formance and fuel economy as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emissions control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap in loose improperly installed or damaged the word gASCAP will display in the odometer If this occurs tighten the fuel filler cap until a clicking sound is heard and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn 422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN off the message If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the MIL EMISSIONS INSPE
21. if Green if equipped Pink m equipped J9 40 Amp Hex Fuel PZEV Mo J17 40 Amp Starter Solenoid Green tor if equipped Green J10 30 Amp If Equipped Head J18 20 Amp NGC Powertrain Pink Hamp Washer Relay Yellow Control Module BUX Manual Tun Transmission Range mg Valg J19 60 Amp Radiator Fan Motor Ju 30 Amp If Equipped Sway Yellow Pink Bar Thatchum Secu Qo 30 Amp Front Windshield tity BL X Pawer Pink Wiper Hi Low Sliding Door Ec y por t Ja 20 Amp _ Front Rear Washer Blue 460 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN Cartridge Mini war Cartridge Mini PU Cavity Puse Fuse Description Cavity Fuss F s Description J22 25 Amp m Sunroof Module if M7 20 Amp Power Outlet 2 Bat White equipped Yellow tery or Accessory M1 15Amp Center High Mounted ACC Selectable Blue Stop Light CHMSL M8 m 20 Amp Front Heated Seats M2 u 20Amp If Equipped Trailer Yellow if equipped Yellow Lights M9 u 20Amp If Equipped Rear M3 __ 20Amp Front Rear Axle Yellow Heated Seats Yellow MA 10 Amp If Equipped Trailer Red Tow M5 E 25 Amp Power Inverter if Natural equipped M6 20Amp Power Outlet 1 Yellow Accessory ACC Rain Sensor ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 461 Cavity ied boxes Description Cavity Bod sea Description M10 15 Amp Vanity Lamps M12 E 30
22. information automatically Turn to this position to select Refer to Automatic Operation Rear Zone ATC for more information 2 Rear Blower Control The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the O Off position There are 10 blower speeds 3 Rear Temperature Control Provides rear seat occupants with independent tempera ture control Turn left for cooler or right for warmer temperature settings in the rear cabin When the rear 910r climate control is turned OFF by the rear button on the Rear Zone ATC Three Zone ATC a red indicator will appear at the The Rear Zone ATC for the rear passengers is in the bottom of the Rear Temperature Control Knob overhead console above the second row passenger seats 298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEM 4 Rear Mode Control Turn to select Panel Bi Level or Floor for the mode of rear cabin air distribution Automatic Operation Two and Three Zone ATC The Two and Three Zone ATC systems automatically maintain the climate in the cabin of the vehicle To accomplish this the system gathers information from the climate controls from a dual sun sensor located in the top of the instrument panel from an infrared sensor located between the sun visors and from various sensors located throughout the vehicle e The climate controls provide the system with operator input e The dual sun sensor monitors sun load coming through the windshiel
23. ing limit for any reason including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recom mended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pres sure warning Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light illuminates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light to turn off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale light will turn off once the system re For example your vehicle may have a recom mended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 33 psi 227 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi 193 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to ap proximately 24 psi 165 kPa This tire pressure is low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitor ing Telltale light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi 193 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will still be on In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value ee STARTING AND OPERATING 357 NOTE CAUTION
24. ing the visor to block out the sun 1 Fold down the sun visor 2 Unclip the visor from the center clip 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EE 3 Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to NOTE The video will only display while the shift lever extend it is in REVERSE EQUIPPED The Parkview Rear Backup Camera captures live video Drivers must be careful when backing up a vehicle of the area behind the vehicle The live video displays on even when using the Rear Backup Camera Always the radio s display screen when backing up your vehicle check carefully for pedestrians animals other ve hicles obstructions and blind spots before backing up a vehicle You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay atten tion while backing up a vehicle Failure to do so can To operate the Rear Backup Camera result in serious injury or death NOTE Refer to Setting Display Properties under System Settings in the Navigation User s Manual for navigation screen brightness adjustment instructions 1 Start the engine 2 Move the shift lever into REVERSE 3 Wait one to two seconds and the video will display on the radio s display screen en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 CAUTION e To avoid vehicle damage only use the Rear Backup Camera as a parking aid as the camera is unable to capture every obstacle or object in your drive path To avoid vehi
25. 04 208 SOLVICE uuo ye aca og qa euo NU aac A 465 466 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator 215 Side Marker cd Ee ARENA 466 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 213 355 Traction Control 000 215 332 334 Turn Signal 81 146 149 207 466 468 Vanity Mirror 4e e Re e eR Rs 91 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 205 Load Floor Cargo see ee 188 Loading Vehicle 1 2533 enguers 375 376 Capacities lt kan FRAG waa steni Oho 376 Tires perede bed doeawad Hho Ge aw ee od 341 EOGKS oum GA aoe E Une EN IE ares E 28 Auto Unlock 2 0 0 0 0 0 000 cee eee 31 Automatic Door 20 2 0000 eee 30 Child Protection uice dug eder rai 32 DOOF iaceo deed Se MA SURG Lx a ex ens 28 Power D r 644 44 eh ed dance Pee eR eR RESO 30 Low Tire Pressure System llle 355 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH iue cde emer SU hx IRE 71 73 Lubrication Body as resseta ee 437 Luggage Rack Roof Rack 196 L mbarS pport 2 22 9 RR RR 127 Maintenance Free Battery lille 431 Maintenance General 0000000 424 Maintenance Procedures 00000000 424 Maintenance Schedule 478 Maintenance Sunroof 0 00000 173 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 215 422 Manual Service 0 0 0 ce ee eee 492 Map Reading Lights 005 151 Marker Lights Side 0 00000 000 466 Master Cyl
26. 145 cm tall 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee To position a child into the Integrated Child Booster Seat follow these steps 1 Pull the release loop forward to release the latch and seat cushion 022605389 New Integrated 1 3 Place the child upright in the seat with their back firmly against the seatback 81d41e08 4 Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt 2 Lift the seat cushion up and push back to lock it in the booster seat position 5 Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around the child s lap THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 NOTE The lap portion of the seat belt should below on 8 To release the seat belt push the red button on the the hips and as snug as possible buckle 6 Once the seat belt is long enough to fit properly insert B the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click RESO Be certain that the seat cushion is locked securely into position before using the seat Otherwise the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat cushion could cause serious injury Children too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat 7
27. 2n the accessory drive belt on 2 4L and 2 7L en 120 000 200 000 120 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 483 t This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner but is not required to maintain emissions warranty WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS ll Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Your Vehicle 44 wea Ra Ree xar 487 Speech Impaired TDD TTY 489 Prepare For The Appointment 487 Service Contract iss s aces E E ae 489 Prepare A Lists 5 eek kno eo eee y ess 487 W Warranty Information U S Vehicles Only 490 Be Reasonable With Requests 487 MMOPAR 9Parts 0000000000 491 a iE You Need Assistance oua ce cree 487 W Reporting Safety Defects 491 Chrysler LLC Customer Center 488 In The 50 United States And Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 488 Washington Dies In Mexico Contact css
28. All vehicle keys must be taken to an authorized dealer at the time of service to be repro grammed General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm VSA system monitors the vehicle doors and liftgate for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unauthorized operation If something triggers the alarm the system will prevent the vehicle from starting sound the horn intermittently flash the headlights and taillights and flash the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster Rearming of the System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the system will turn off the horn after three minutes turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes and then the system will rearm itself ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 To Arm the System 1 Remove the key from the ignition switch and exit the vehicle 2 Lock the doors and liftgate by pressing the power door LOCK switch or the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter NOTE The system will not arm if you lock the doors with the manual door LOCK plungers
29. Doors seen 31 Automatic Dimming Mirror 89 Automatic Door Locks 000005 30 31 Automatic Headlights sss 147 Automatic Oil Change Indicator 210 225 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 293 Automatic Transaxle llle 311 449 Adding Fluid insere R es 449 476 lui ML 451 Fluid and Filter Changes 451 Fluid Level Check 0 0 0 0 0000005 449 Interlock System lessen 312 313 Reset Mode lesen 316 Selection Of Lubricant 005 476 Shift g wc See v REG e dee ERR Sa 311 Special Additives 0000 451 Autostick iio zu die RERO CES Se eae aos 317 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet Power Outlet 174 Auxiliary Power Outlet 0000050 174 Back Up Lights 2 veh eR ER ag piati 468 Ball JOINTS e ies e candies eGo sae aed 5 437 Battery iue d weder ho ale eS ae Soe ed A 431 Charging System Light 212 Emergency Starting 1 066 086 sn eee eses 407 Gas Caution sss a aR eaid hii naase 432 Jump Starting iie c i Ro ew 407 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 25 Location 12d oe RR PRU Rs 407 431 Bearings ace ead peewee dere oe b Ys 451 Belts Drive deduce Xara ENTRE 428 B lts Seat a cbr ere Bile he nae E 41 80 Beverage Cooler 1 1 eee 180 Body Mechanism Lubrication 437 Booster 5eat cenae s ace cee age ur ee 67 B
30. EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 403 81f4d7eb Jack Engagement Locations 404 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME WARNING To avoid possible personal injury handle the wheel 4 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise with the jack handle Raise the vehicle until the tire just clears the road surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 5 Remove the wheel nuts For vehicles so equipped remove the wheel cover from the wheel by hand Do not pry the wheel cover off Then pull the wheel off the hub covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp edges NOTE For vehicles so equipped the wheel cover is held on the wheel by the wheel nuts When reinstalling the original wheel properly align the wheel cover to the valve stem place the wheel cover onto the wheel and then install the wheel nuts 6 Install the spare tire NOTE e For vehicles so equipped do not attempt to install a center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 405 e Refer to Compact Spare Tire and to Limited Use 9 Finish tightening the wheel nuts Push down on the Spare under Tires General Information in Sec wrench while tightening for in
31. braking capacity in an emergency Brake and Power Steering Hoses When servicing the vehicle for scheduled maintenance inspect the surface of the hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage Hard and brittle rubber cracking tears cuts abrasions and exces sive swelling suggest deterioration of the rubber Particu lar attention should be made to examining those hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 447 Ensure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or collapsed Inspect all hose clamps and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present NOTE Often fluids such as oil power steering fluid and brake fluid are used during assembly plant operations to ease the assembly of hoses to couplings Therefore oil wetness at the hose coupling area is not necessarily an indication of leakage Actual dripping of hot fluid when systems are under pressure during vehicle operation should be noted before a hose is replaced based on leakage Inspect the brake hoses whenever the brake system is serviced and at every engine oil change Inspect hy draulic brake hoses for surface cracking scuffing or worn spots If there is any evidence of cracking scuffing or worn spots the hose should be replaced immediately Eventual deterioration of the hose can take place resulting in a possibility of a burst failure WARNING Worn
32. dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The UConnect system will work the same as if you dial the number using voice recognition NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the UConnect system to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute Off When you mute the UConnect system you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the UConnect system e Press the Voice Recognition button e Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the UConnect system e Press the Voice Recognition button e Following the beep say Mute off 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The UConnect system allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect system without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your UConnect paired cellular phone to the UConnect system or vice versa press the Voice Recog nition button and say Iransfer Call Connect or Disco
33. en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 lorc PM mm 180 In Floor Storage Bin With Removable Liner 186 Beverage Cooler Storage Compartment Bl Cargo Area Features sess 188 If Equipped 4 23 2 Re Rem m 180 Rechargeable Flashlight If Equipped 188 oco eis E B 182 Cargo Management System 188 3 Center Console Storage i eese 183 ll Rear Window Features llle 193 Flip n Stow Front Passenger Seat Storage Brae Wendew a a vue lf Equipped ice cr kr ad eee ee es 184 Rear Window Defroster If Equipped 195 Second Row Passenger Seat Temporary ll Roof Luggage Rack If Equipped 196 Storage Bini dave ed eee cae me rea 185 Second Row Map Pocket And Grocery Retainers If Equipped 186 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EE MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear E aaa window A two point pivot system allows for horizontal f and vertical mirror adjustment Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position B aiias toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the wind 2 shield 81f4d4ad Manual Rearview Mirror en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 Automatic Dimm
34. inflate to their full size The bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 ms This is about half of the time that it takes to blink your eyes The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The driver s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag The passenger s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position every one for the best interaction with the front airbag The Supplemental Side Impact SRS Side Curtain Airbags are designed to activate only in certain side collisions When the ORC detects a collision requiring the side curtain airbag to inflate it signals the inflators on the crash side of the vehicle A quantity of nontoxic 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee gas is generated to inflate the side curtain airbag The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The airbag inflates in about 30 ms about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain airbag is only about 3 1 2
35. or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Main Menu Towing English Francais Last See Number Phonebook bu Phone Flowchart is redialed UConnect Tutorial See Setup Flowchart The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used The phones paired are available across all Number associated Number with entry is Dialed is dialed languages Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf7b 115 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Y at a time Voice Tree Phonebook New Entry Enter Name Enter Location Enter Location Current Number is played Enter New Number Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf80 Enter Number Entry Deleted Phonebook Cleared New Entry Added UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 Voice Tree Setup Setup Select a language English Espanol Toggle Pair List Phones New phone Confirmation will Prompts temporarily on off or Francais Say 4 digit System Lists override pin code Phones Select phone mu Phone to be deleted m ones P Enter Name of phone and follow prompts to complete pairing System System Lists All Phones Deleted
36. recline the seat lean back lift the lever position the seatback as desired and then release the lever To return Seatback Release the seatback to its normal upright position lean back lift the lever lean forward and then release the lever once the seatback is in the upright position 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING e Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be adjusted properly and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked 20 Seatback Armrest Second Row Passenger Seat The latch release loop is located at the top of the 20 seatback armrest Pull the release loop upward to re lease the latch and then downward to lower the 20 seatback armrest Latch Release Loop ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 Raise the 20 seatback armrest and lock it in place when not in use or when additional seating area is required WARNING Keep the latch clean and free of objects and be certain that the seatback is locked securely into position Otherwise the seat will not provide the proper
37. refer to Tires General Informa tion in this section for information on replacement D iler while usi ie MM M d tires and for the proper tire replacement procedures epee AS Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe will not increase the vehicles GVWR and GAWR and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to limits Tires General Information in this section for infor mation on tire pressures and for proper tire inflation procedures Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Also check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically 388 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with WARNING a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hy Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 draulic brake lines It can overload your brake sys Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 tem and cause it to fail You might not have brakes Ibs 907 kg when you need them and could h
38. release the joystick 5 Turn the knob surrounding the joystick to select Set Hours and then press and release the joystick 6 Turn the knob surrounding the joystick to set the hour highlighted on the clock on the screen Press and release the joystick when done 7 Turn the knob surrounding the joystick to select Set Minutes and then press and release the joystick 8 Turn the knob surrounding the joystick to set the minutes highlighted on the clock on the screen Press and release the joystick when done 9 Press and release the SETUP button to exit the screen Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the screen when the system is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting NOTE You can skip Steps 2 and 3 by pressing and holding the TIME button on the radio for three sec onds 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Press and release the SETUP button on the radio 3 If Time Setup is highlighted on the menu press and release the joystick in the center of the radio Otherwise turn the knob surrounding the joystick to select Time Setup and then press and release the joystick ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271 4 Turn the knob surrounding the joystick to scroll to Clock if Radio off and then press and release the joystick to change the current setting A check mark will display next to Clock if Radio off when the feature
39. wait 30 seconds before activating the Flash to Pass function again Interior Lights Courtesy Reading Lights Models with Overhead Console These lights are mounted in the overhead console be tween the sun visors They are also located in the headliner above the second row passenger seats Press and release the lens to turn ON or turn OFF the light manually These lights also turn on when you press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter open a door or the liftgate or turn the Dimmer Control completely upward to the second de tent For models equipped with LED lighting you can swivel the lens socket to direct the light as desired Models without Overhead Console There are two courtesy reading lights mounted in the headliner between the sun visors Press and release the button next to the lens to turn ON or turn OFF the light manually A courtesy light is also mounted in the head liner above the second row passenger seats Press and release the lens to turn ON or turn OFF the light manually These lights also turn on when you press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter open a door or the liftgate or turn the Dimmer Control completely upward to the second detent Cargo Light This light is mounted in the liftgate trim panel It turns on when you press the UNLOCK button on the RKE trans mitter open a door or the liftgate or turn the Dimmer Control completely upward to the second detent 152 UNDERSTA
40. 00 351 Trip Odometer coser ae Re VUES 209 Trip Odometer Reset Button 212 218 Tam Signals eR RR Rem 146 149 207 468 UCI Connector sists asc gia Sele ee a Sie eae ea 278 UConnect Hands Free Phone 518 INDEX EN Uniform Tire Quality Grades 493 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 278 Universal Serial Bus USB Port 234 266 Universal Transmitter 000 163 Unleaded Gasoline llle 368 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 47 Upholstery Care ccc sese bbe ende ges 454 USB Port 212e 3 99e v REPRE n 234 266 Vacuum Vapor Harnesses Vanity Mirrors 2 xa goes mee eR Ros dob Ue cen 91 Variance Compass rece tiise asa ai es 219 229 Vehicle Certification Label s 375 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 Vehicle Loading iles 342 375 376 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Vehicle Storage ee esea 300 464 Vehicle Theft Alarm Security Alarm 18 Video Entertainment System Rear Seat Video System Viscosity Engine Oil 2 2 0 2 ee eee 427 Voice Recognition System VR 120 Warning Flasher Hazard 56 394 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 205 Warnings and Cautions llle 6 Warranty Information 00006 490 Washer Adding Fluid ia sec ort nn 157 194 438 Washers Windshield
41. 148 Dealer Service llle 424 Defroster Rear Window s 195 Defroster Windshield 80 286 287 Delay Intermittent Wipers llus 155 Diagnostic System Onboard 421 Digital Video Disc DVD Player 234 266 Dimmer Control 0 0 0 0 cee eee 152 Dimmer Switch Headlight 150 Dipsticks Automatic Transaxle lesen 449 Oil Engine 5 2 m ema teg 424 en INDEX 501 Disabled Vehicle Towing 4 412 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 443 Engine Qil ess s re one eb s 428 Door Locks x en Ue RD RS CR 28 Door Locks Automatic sess 30 31 Door Opener Garage xke ace e nhac 163 Drive Belts 2 pate dive pte AERE Te Ed ens 428 Driving On Slippery Surfaces lille 320 Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water s iss ebbe ESAE ss 321 DVD Player Video Entertainment System 276 E85 Fuel 2229 3 IR PRETI Res 364 Electric Remote Mirrors sees 90 Electrical Outlet Auxiliary Power Outlet 174 Electrical Power Outlets 00 0 174 Electronic Brake Control System 328 Anti Lock Brake System 0 327 Brake Assist System 0000000 330 Electronic Roll Mitigation 331 Electronic Stability Program 332 Traction Control System lille 331 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM
42. 50 Seat Belt Extender lll lessen 50 ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental Lock Your Vehicle 0 2 0 0 00 ee ee 79 Restraint System SRS Airbag 50 REEL Event Data Recorder EDR 63 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside Child Restraint ze metet 65 The Vehicle cvy RR KEE ll Engine Break In Recommendations 77 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make W Safety Tips occidisse o RR rassis 78 DRRSIMS TDS NOBICIS casae dla iudi eee M Transporting Passengers sess 78 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system This system consists of a Fob with Integrated Key and a Wireless Ignition Node WIN with integral ignition switch You can insert the double sided integrated key into the igni tion switch with either side up Wireless Ignition Node WIN The Wireless Ignition Node WIN operates similarly to an ignition switch It has four operating positions three of which are detented and one spring loaded The de tented positions are LOCK ACC and ON The START position is a spring loaded momentary contact position When released from the START position the switch automatically returns to the detented ON position Wireless Ignition Node WIN en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTI
43. Amp Radio Amplifier Blue Hands Free Module Green AMP HFM if equipped M13 20 Amp Cabin Compartment Remote Display if Yelow Node CCN Multi equipped Satellite function Switch Siren Digital Audio Re Module m ceive DOR ed M14 20 Amp _ If Equipped Trailer equipped Universal Yellow Tow BUX Garage Door Opener a UGDO if M15 20 Amp Auto Dim Rearview equipped Vanity Yellow uh 3 e Light Video Enter Infrared Sensor IR tainment System if equipped Multi VES if equipped u function Switch Tire Pressure Monitor Sys M11 10 Amp Automatic Tempera tem TPMS if Red ture Control ATC oped Transf m if equipped Under COME d i o hood Light Mi aie MS equipped 462 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Natural Cartridge Mini A Cartridge Mini NN Cavity p Fuse Description Cavity Pu Fitsd Description M16 10 Amp Occupant Restraint M20 15 Amp Electronic Vehicle In m Red Controller ORC Blue formation Center Occupant Classifica EVIC if equipped tion Module OCM m Interior Lighting M17 15 Amp Left Park Side Steering Wheel Blue Marker Running Tail Switches if Lights License Lights equipped Switch M18 15 Amp Right Park Side Banik Blue Marker Running Tail M21 E 20Amp Auto Shut Down Lights Yellow ASD 3 M19 25Amp Auto Shut Down M2 Amp Right Horn Natural _ ASD 1 and 2 Red M
44. C Button Press and release to change the current setting The indicator illuminates when ON 81f4d77d Rear Zone Manual Climate Control 1 RR Control Turns the climate control in the overhead console above the second row passenger seats ON and OFF Press and release to change the current setting 2 Rear Blower Control The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the O Off position There are three blower speeds 3 Rear Temperature Control Provides independent temperature control for the rear cabin Turn left for cooler or right for warmer tempera ture settings in the rear cabin 292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 81dc6d95 Rear Zone Manual Climate Control The Rear Zone Manual Climate Control for the rear passengers is located in the overhead console above the second row passenger seats 1 Rear Blower Control The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the O Off position There are three blower speeds 2 Rear Temperature Control Provides rear seat occupants with independent tempera ture control Turn left for cooler or right for warmer temperature settings in the rear cabin 3 Lockout This indicator illuminates when the climate control is turned OFF by the RR control on the Rear Zone Manual Climate Control in the instrument panel 4 Rear Mode Control Turn to select Panel Bi Level or Floor for the mode of rear cabin air dist
45. Clean Air llle 369 Gasoline Puel Lies eme KERERE 368 COnSerVing dedce eess e Gh ep pace Cd aes 226 Gasoline Reformulated 369 Gauges Coolant Temperature 0000 205 Fuels Rer py LR Ra n fata es 205 Odometer ise retas hee e S ERST 209 Speedometer 222 46g biota Grad PR des 207 Tachometer ic 2vsaded hs oes Gao bee ones 208 Gear Ranges 2 253 993 G Yan BETES OO 314 Gearshift 6 eee bv eae r REB ERR 314 General Information 18 26 120 318 363 General Maintenance 0 00 00 424 Glass Cleaning vars a ERES SPP E 456 Gross Axle Weight Rating 375 378 en INDEX 505 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 375 377 GVWR Gee ay estait Res EX ee Se as 375 Hands Free Phone UConnect 93 266 267 Hard Drive HDD 234 266 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow standing Water sisse e Re e 321 Hazard Warning Flasher 394 Head Restraitts 4342 39 9er ede 130 Head R st aden dk et res dee RR RE dae 130 Headlights 4 i cc ic oe um 146 Automatic sse 147 Bulb Replacement xsus dits agta teiaa a i 466 Cleaning uus est yas a a galas E E 456 Delay RM 147 High Beam og puces d eso e pela E 466 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 150 Lights On Reminder isses 148 On With Wipers ssissesssisisnasy aat 147 156 PASSING cns eas Rae RERO aoe OR RR OAS 150 SWIC cus eor oe
46. DVD RW DVD R DVD RW and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names nn e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension nn e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 WMA files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times 250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se If a disc contains multi formats such as CD audio and MP3 WMA tracks the radio will only play the MP3 WMA tracks on that disc Supported MP3 WMA File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 WMA extension as MP3 WMA files Non MP3 W
47. During fast scroll you may notice a slight delay in updating the informa tion on the radio display During all List modes the iPod will display all lists in wrap around mode So if the track you wish to select is at the bottom of the list you just turn the Tune Scroll knob backward counterclockwise to get to the track faster Radio Preset Buttons In the List mode the radio preset buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod device e 1 Playlists e 2 Artists e 3 Albums e 4 Genres e 5 Audiobooks e 6 Podcasts After pressing a preset button you will see the list you are in on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line To exit the List mode without selecting a track press the same preset button again to go back to Play mode 282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEM LIST Button Pressing the LIST button will take to the top level menu of the iPod This takes you to the same top level menu as on your iPod Turn the Tune Scroll knob to list the top menu item you wish to select and then press the Tune Scroll knob This will take you to the next sub menu list item of the iPod and you can follow the same steps to go to the desired track in that list Not all iPod sub menu levels are available on this system MUSIC TYPE Button The MUSIC TYPE button is another shortcut button to the genre listing on your iPod REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS I
48. Feature with Anti Pinch Protection If Equipped On some models the driver s power window switch has an Auto up feature Pull the window switch up to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the Auto up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way pull the window switch up to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop NOTE e If the window runs into any obstacle during Auto closure it will reverse direction and then stop Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window e Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close window manually WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed To avoid personal injury be sure to clear your arms hands fingers and objects from the window path before closing the window Such en trapment may result in serious injury ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver s door trim panel allows you to disable the window control on the other doors To disable the window controls press and release the window lockout button setting it in the down position To enable the window controls press an
49. Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In Winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter If Equipped The A C Air Filter will reduce but not eliminate diesel and agricultural smells The filter acts on air coming from outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the pas senger compartment Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 for A C Air Filter service information or see your authorized dealer for service Refer to the Mainte nance Schedule in Section 8 for filter service intervals 302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle press the button to turn recirculate off AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS Set the Fan control to the high position Press the button VERY HOT Set the Mode control at or between and 2J Set the temperature control to full cool After the hot air is pushed from the vehicle press the K amp button to turn recirculate on and roll up the windows Once you are comfortable press the il gt button to turn recirculate off and adjust the temperature control for comfort WARM WEATHER Press the button to turn recirculate off Le If it s sunny set the Mode control at or near and turn the air conditioning on If O ai MA p a it s c
50. Liftgate Press and release the UNLOCK button on the transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors First This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the transmitter To change the cur rent setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to RKE Unlock under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed transmitter for at least four seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EE 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter while you are inside th
51. Owner s Manual The UConnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing The following are general phone to UConnect system pairing instructions Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing When prompted after the beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Identi fication Number PIN which you will later need to enter into your cellular phone You can enter any four digit PIN You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the UConnect system a name for your cellular phone Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between 1 and 7 with 1 being the highest priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your UConnect system However at any given time only one cellular phone can be in use connected to your UConnect system The priority allows the UConnect system to know which cellular phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority 3 and priority 5 phones are present in the vehicle the UConnect system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time refe
52. Press the button located in the center of the switch to change to the next preset that you have programmed CD DVD MAINTENANCE To keep the CD DVD discs in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If a disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper paper CD labels or tape to the disc avoid scratching a disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzine thinner cleaners or antistatic sprays 5 Store a disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose a disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store a disc where temperatures may become too high 8 Do not play discs that are small in size or have irregular shapes RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the cellular phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation CLIMATE CONTROLS The air conditioning and heating system is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather For infor mation about basic climate control functions refer to General Climate Control Functions
53. RR AU YA EY POPE Y 146 Time Delay isiewess oe 147 Heated Mirrors llle 91 Heated Seats 0 0 cece eee 132 lE be sce oa aya ok bi Sh eae le Re Gh 288 289 Heater Engine Block 1 sei Rs 311 High Beam Indicator 00050 207 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 150 Hitches Trailer Towing me tesece hebes ee PAG eS 381 Holder Coin 2 1 lee 183 Holder Cup esse RE is awe XU Een 178 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 163 Hood Release scere eb RERO 144 HOSES L2 eet e x i suine s 445 446 Ignition Key vaaurenceg ue ym oe Seat te tial cer Rus 12 14 Ignition Key Removal 00 00005 14 Illuminated Entry lille 20 Immobilizer Sentry Key 200 15 Indicator Traction Control 0 215 Infant Restraint srair erea a enee es 65 66 Inflation Pressure Tires nnno nannaa aaa 213 Information Center Vehicle 221 Inside Rearview Mirror sess 88 Instrument Cluster ser cocserireiee sera 204 205 Instrument Panel and Controls 203 Instrument Panel Cover ss 454 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 456 Integrated Power Module Fuses 457 Interior Appearance Care 00 00 454 Interior Lighting 000 146 151 Interior Lights 3 2404 ove RR 152 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 155 Introduction 1 eare a aa ee 4 Inverte
54. START position temperature must be brought up above freezing point before attempting jump start 410 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE NOTE Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Section7 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE for information on accessing the battery for service or If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it replacement can often be moved by a rocking motion Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the WARNING front wheels Then shift back and forth between RE VERSE and 1st gear Usually the least accelerator pedal Any procedure other than above could result in pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spin 1 Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out ning the wheels is most effective the battery vent NOTE 2 Personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion trol turn the system OFF before attempting to If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Con rock the vehicle Refer to Partial Off Mode 3 Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or of immobilized vehicle under Electronic Stability Program ESP in Section 5 ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 411 WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause axle and tire damage or failure A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously wit
55. SeatBelts sisse rear e arpit 39 41 80 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 46 And Pregnant Women sells 50 Child Restraint 00 0 65 66 69 75 Extender i nd eae edd oooh edt oe SG ems 50 Front Seat 2 pee ea cet eee S as 41 42 INSPOCHON caue dte cabins PRR a HEE a Race 80 Operating Instructions 00 42 PretenSlOners 4 4 wu See BR ae E E 47 Rear Seat 2 ens 41 Reminder s seca wx Rar XE ache es 208 Untwisting Procedure 04 47 Seats s Sawa aaa VC ROS wae a al a EL B eR G 124 Adjustment seste 3e ee eu eee et 124 Child Booster 0 0 0 ccc ee ene 67 Cleaning 23i 0e b mde ente doc dines 455 Easy Entry o is xe cR xa ee aOR n Eas 139 Head Restraints llle 130 Heated as vy Race eg Ea eR RC 132 Height Adjustment llle 127 129 Lumbar Support 00000004 127 POWER 12d Bek Kae ee RR EES ROWE 4 129 Rear Folding 0 0 0 0 cnni is 134 141 Reclnig ia otiagdu sion e er adr pr 125 Reclining Rear 6 6 ee 137 141 Seatback Release 128 134 141 uo DEP OE 129 TEM 514 INDEX EN Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 208 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 441 474 S lection OF Oll ua cena cia aeons CHEER Ree 426 Sentry Key Immobilizer 15 Sentry Key Programming sess 17 Sentry Key Replacement 16 Service Assistance 00 eee
56. To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or when starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by momentarily depressing the ESP OFF button Once the situation requiring Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESP back on by momentarily depressing the ESP OFF button This may be done while the vehicle is in motion ESP BAS Warning Light and ESP TCS Indicator Light The malfunction indicator for the ESP is com ESP bined with the BAS indicator The ESP BAS BAS Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESP TCS Indicator Light in the instrument cluster both turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should both turn off with the engine running If the ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator Light turns on continuously with the engine running a mal function has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system or both If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected ee STARTING AND OPERATING 335 NOTE NOTE The TSC is disabled when the ESP system is in e The ESP TCS Indicator Light and the ESP BAS Mal the Partial Off mode function Indicator Light will turn on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON WARNING e TSC cannot stop all traile
57. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se ON The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned OFF if they were turned ON by this feature To make your selection press and release the RESET button until ON or OFF appears KEY OFF POWER DELAY When this feature is selected the power window switches radio hands free system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and ignition powered outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection press and release the RESET button until Off 45 sec 5 min or 10 min appears ILLUMIN APPROACH When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make your selec tion press and hold the RESET button until Off 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears DISPLAY UNITS IN The EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection press and release the RESET button until U S or METRIC appears NAV TURN BY TURN If Equipped When ON is selected the Turn by Turn directions will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a desig nated turn within a programmed route To make your selection press and release t
58. UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger doors and liftgate When All Doors 1st Press is selected all doors and the liftgate will unlock on the first press of the RKE UN LOCK button To make your selection press and release the RESET button until Driver Door 1st Press or All Doors 1st Press appears SOUND HORN WITH LOCK When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE LOCK button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the flash lights with lock feature To make your selection press and release the RESET button until ON or OFF appears FLASH LAMP WITH LOCK When ON is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection press and release the RESET button until ON or OFF appears HEADLAMP OFF DELAY When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds after turning the ignition to the LOCK position To make your selection press and release the RESET button until 0 30 60 or 90 appears HEADLAMPS WITH WIPERS Available with Auto Headlights Only When ON is selected and the multifunction lever is placed in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned 232
59. Vehicle Information Center in Section 4 Windshield Washers To use the washer pull the Windshield Wiper Washer control lever toward you and hold it for as long as washer spray is desired If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in the delay range the wipers will operate in low speed for two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in the OFF position the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles and then turn OFF ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to an accident You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use Adding Washer Fluid NOTE Refer to the Engine Compartment diagram in Section 7 for the location of the washer fluid reservoir The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers is located in the engine compartment Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must
60. When a system fault is detected the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition key is cycled this sequence es STARTING AND OPERATING 359 will repeat providing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPMS sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPMS sensors NOTE 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit a chime will sound and the TPMS Telltale light will turn on upon the next ignition key cycle 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15 m mph 25 km h the TPMS Telltale light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPMS T
61. a a oa i Maintenance sce bum nacre EROR der Rn es 367 Deo a a dad nt Bl Fuel Requirements 000 368 Epstein Sy atch Te BGPP eG aaea am 2 4L And 2 7L Engines o on 368 General Information 0 0 363 SBE Pai eco EET eng PCEUE es gocce M sga DReformulated Gasoline 0 0 ee E 85 General Information 364 Caso kme xy ena Blends Ethanol Fuel E B cicer 365 INTE T ASOME uenire en idaga eese Fuel Requirements syr stra E 365 Material Added T0 Bils tv scissa cim Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Fuel System Cautions 371 Vehicles E 85 And Gasoline Vehicles 366 Carbon Monoxide Warnings 372 vitis C aera ened tae eee ey 307 Mi dding Fuel 2 Rem 372 Cruising RANEE oe aes ee UR a ass 367 Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap iss 372 306 STARTING AND OPERATING EE Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 374 Trailer Hitch Classification 381 a Vehicle Loading oi vest vee ek E ERR 375 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Vehicle Certification Label 0 0 220050 375 TISIUDRSSEDESM einen trea hates anh ie uid Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR 375 Trailer And Tongue Weight 384 Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR 375 Towing Requirements lesse 385 Overloading 1s seescer rriobz
62. a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires In addition the ee STARTING AND OPERATING 361 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing ENRER ARN aun oo 81826bed Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with low pressure those flashing in the EVIC graphic to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flash ing and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Check TPMS Warning When a system fault is detected the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime In addition the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received 362 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN 81826bd7 If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressu
63. accept phone book entries from your phone using the Bluetooth 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN Object Exchange Profile OBEX Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to send these entries from your phone NOTE e The phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature e Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they are already connected to any system via Bluetooth and you may see a message on the phone display that the Bluetooth link is busy In this case the user must first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to the UConnect system and then send the address book entry via Bluetooth Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to drop the Bluetooth connection e If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it will only use the first 24 characters Edit Entries in the UConnect Phonebook NOTE Editing names in the phonebook is recom mended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit e Next choose the number designation home work mobile or pager that you wish to edit e When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finis
64. as longas Maintaining Your Airbag System the battery has power or until the ignition key is WARNING removed e Modifications to any part of the airbag system NOTE The interior lights can only be deactivated if the could cause it to fail when you need it You could key is removed from the ignition switch or the vehicle is be injured because the airbags are not there to diven protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger s side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or frame e Unlocks the doors automatically You need proper knee impact protection in a collision Do not mount or locate any aftermarket equipment on or behind the knee impact bolster It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has airbags ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate Airbag Warning Light You will want to have the airbags ready to 9 inflate for your protection in an impact While the airbag system is designed to be mainte nance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the system promptly e The Airbag Warning Light does not come on or flickers during the
65. bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together Connecting Latch Plate To Buckle 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE BEBE 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up a bit on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision Removing Slack From Belt ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 WARNING 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully B WARNING A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as pos sible and keep it snug A twisted belt can t do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take
66. cal loads 4 Remove the protective cover over the remote jump start positive battery post in the engine compartment Connect one end of the jumper cable to the positive battery post Connect the other end of the same cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery Refer to the following illustration for jump starting connections 5 Connect the other cable first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then to the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery Make sure you have a good contact on the engine ground Refer to the following illustration for jump starting connections ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 409 7 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery 8 When removing the jumper cables reverse the se quence exactly Be careful of the moving belts and fan 9 Reinstall the protective cover over the remote jump start positive battery post WARNING During cold weather when temperatures are below 6 1 Positive Terminal freezing point electrolyte in a discharged battery 2 Negative Terminal may freeze Do not attempt jump starting because the battery could rupture or explode The battery 6 If the vehicle is equipped with Sentry Key Immobi lizer turn the ignition switch to the ON position for three seconds before moving the ignition switch to the
67. cell phone has network coverage and stays paired to the UConnect system Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance NOTE The Towing Assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the 24 Hour Towing Assistance cover age details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on the 24 Hour Towing Assistance Card ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the UConnect system Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working with Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your UConnect system to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some ser vices require immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the UConnect sys
68. code for the radio DVD player it will not play the disc Customers may take their vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code of the player a maximum of five times CAUTION The radio may shut down during extremely hot conditions When this occurs the radio will indicate Disc Hot and shut off until a safe temperature is reached This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player and other radio internal components NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio LOAD Button Loading Compact Disc s Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism 248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEM Eject Button Ejecting Compact Disc s Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton A withthe corresponding number 1 6 where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove
69. compass heading N S E W NE NW SE and SW and the outside temperature The COMPASS TEMPERATURE DISPLAY button operates en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 this display Press and release the button once to turn on the display Press and release it again to turn off the display Setting Compass Variance Mid Line Cluster Only Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic North and geographic North To allow the compass module to compensate for that difference and ensure accuracy you can set the variance in the compass module to the zone where the vehicle is located according to the Compass Variance Map To set the variance perform the following procedure NOTE e Magnetic materials should be kept away from the top of the instrument panel as this is where the compass sensor is located e The shift lever must be in PARK to enter the variance setting mode To set the variance first turn the ignition switch to the ON position Next press and hold the COMPASS TEMPERATURE DISPLAY button until the current variance zone number displays approximately 10 seconds Then press and release the button to incre ment the variance value by one until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map Finally turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position to exit this mode 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se COMPASS VARIANCE MAP 8000cbab NOTE The default variance setting is Zone
70. computer functions 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEM e System status including vehicle information warning message displays and Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS displays if equipped and e Personal Settings customer programmable features The system allows the driver to select information by pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel EVIC Steering Wheel Switches Press and release this button and the mode displayed will change between Compass Outside Temperature Trip Functions System MENU Status and Personal Settings Button Press this button to reset Trip Functions and p change Personal Settings RESET Button Press this button to scroll through Trip Func V tions Average Fuel Economy Distance To Empty DTE Elapsed Time Units In System SCROLL Status Messages and Personal Settings Cus Button tomer Programmable Features Press this button to display the EN Compass Outside Temperature COMPASS TEMPERA TURE Button UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays the following messages e Turn Signal On with a continuous warning chime if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mi 1 6 km with either turn signal on Left Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e Right Front Turn Sig
71. contact your eyes skin or clothing Don t lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Don t use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Don t allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked posi tive and negative and identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage as battery damage can result ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 433 Air Conditioner Maintenance 7 WARNING For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubr
72. coolant recovery bottle If antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing e If frequent coolant additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pres sure tested for leaks EN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 445 e Maintain coolant concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components e Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed e Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean also e Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory coolant performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Hoses and Vacuum Vapor Harnesses Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage Hard or soft spots brittle rubber cracking tears cuts abrasions and exces sive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber Pay particular attention to the hoses nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold Inspect hose rout ing to be sure hoses do not touch any heat source or moving component
73. e VES CHI CH2 Allows the user to change the mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by pressing the AUDIO SELECT button if equipped e Set Home Clock Pressing the SELECT button allows you to set the clock Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob again to save changes Player Defaults Selecting this item will allow the user to scroll through the following items and set defaults according to customer preference Menu Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the default startup DVD menu language effective only if language supported by disc If you want to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the four digit country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245 Audio Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitle Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle lang
74. ea ie Re mas 283 Left Hand Switch Functions For Media Gie CD Operation s cet Rt 283 B CD DVD Maintenance 0 284 li Radio Operation And Cellular Phones 284 Wi Climate Controls 0 000004 285 General Climate Control Functions AIL SYSTEMS Eme bY ded RR HO oa 285 Single Zone Manual Air Conditioning And Heating System 0000000 288 Two And Three Zone Manual Air Conditioning And Heating Systems If Equipped 289 Two And Three Zone Automatic Temperature Control ATC Systems If Equipped 293 Operating TIPS uiis sce ae eer dra nae 300 en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 81d40f4b 1 Side Window Demist Outlet 5 HAZARD Switch 9 Climate Control 2 Air Outlet 6 Switch Bank 10 Radio 3 Instrument Cluster 7 Beverage Cooler Storage Compartment 11 Ignition Switch 4 Storage Compartment or Remote Display Panel 8 Glove Box f Equipped 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER BRAKE i 81f4d278 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Coolant Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge indicates engine coolant tem perature Any reading within the nor
75. equipped components on the same key chain will not cause a fault unless the additional part is physically held against the trans mitter being used to start the vehicle Cell phones pagers or other RF electronics will not cause interfer ence with this system All of the RKE transmitters provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only RKE transmitters that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a transmitter is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle CAUTION Always remove the keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of RKE trans mitters Duplication of RKE transmitters may be per formed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Programming procedure This procedure consists of programming a blank transmitter to the vehicle electron ics A blank transmitter is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system serviced bring all vehicle RKE transmitters with you to the authorized dealer Customer Key Programming If you have two valid RKE t
76. exceeded WARNING To Avoid Serious Injury or Death Do not use a three prong adaptor Do not insert any objects into the receptacles Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CUP AND BOTTLE HOLDERS CUPHOLDERS Armrest Cupholders Center Console Cupholders ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 BOTTLE HOLDERS 81d02982 Quarter Trim Panel Cupholders Seven Passenger Models Door Bottle Holder 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle holder they can spill when the door is closed burn ing the occupants Be careful when closing the doors to avoid injury STORAGE Beverage Cooler Storage Compartment If Equipped NOTE The Beverage Cooler can keep chilled beverages cool depending on ambient temperature and climate control setting The cooler is intended for non perishable beverages only The Beverage Cooler Storage Compartment is located on the passenger s side of the instrument panel above the glove compartment The beverage retainer inside the cooler is designed to hold up to two 12 oz 0 35 1 cans when placed horizontally in the retainer The beverage retainer is removable to allow for storage of other items in the compartment when not in use as a cooler
77. ground before pressing the lever to SET DECEL To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal or pulling the speed control lever toward you to CANCEL or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the speed control without erasing the set speed from memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning OFF the ignition erases the set speed from memory To Resume Speed If you deactivate the speed control without erasing the set speed from memory and your vehicle speed is above 20 mph 32 km h you can resume the previous set speed To do so push the lever upward to RESUME ACCEL and release and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 To Vary the Speed Setting When the speed control is set you can increase speed by pushing up and holding the lever in RESUME ACCEL Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h speed increase Each time the lever is tapped speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph 5 km h etc To decrease speed while the speed control is set push downward and hold the lever in SET DECEL Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established Tapping SET DECEL once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h speed decrease Each time the lever is tapped speed
78. head restraint 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee 81d00d06 Seat Track Release Lever e Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the tether anchor and remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s instruc tions Tether Strap Mounting e If necessary move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchor ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 NOTE Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 mi 500 km After the initial 60 mi 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic
79. in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 449 CAUTION Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid Seal damage may result Automatic Transaxle The automatic transaxle and differential assembly are contained within a single housing The fluid level in the automatic transaxle should be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced Operation with an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the transaxle and the fluid Fluid Level Check Vehicles with 3 5L Engine The automatic transaxle has no dipstick and is dealer serviced only Fluid Level Check Vehicles with 2 4L and 2 7L Engines Use the following procedure to check the automatic transaxle fluid level properly 1 Park the vehicle on level ground 2 Run the engine at curb idle speed for a minimum of 60 seconds 3 Apply the parking brake fully 4 Place the shift lever momentarily in each gear position ending with the lever in PARK 5 Wipe the area around the dipstick clean to eliminate the possibility of dirt entering the transaxle 450 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 6 Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot or cold Hot fluid is approximately 180 F 82 C which is the normal operating temperature after the vehicle is driven at least 15 mi 24 km Hot fluid cannot be held comfortably between the fingertips Cold fluid is at a tempe
80. inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and leave you stranded When parking on a flat surface place the shift lever in the PARK position first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill it is important to apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transaxle locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you 324 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the lower left corner of the instrument panel To apply the parking brake push the parking brake pedal down and then remove your foot from the pedal To release the parking brake push down on the parking brake pedal and then release Parking Brake The brake light in the instrument cluster will turn on when the parking brake is applied and the ignition switch is in the ON position ee STARTING AND OPERATING 325 NOTE This light only shows that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application WARNING The Brake System Warning Light in the instru e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving BRAKE ment cluster will turn on wh
81. is selected 5 Press and release the SETUP button to exit the screen SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED REN REQ RER RES REU RADIOS ONLY Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account at no addi tional charge For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Cana dian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps
82. is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 4 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu 5 Touch the screen where the word Save is displayed 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEM SALES CODE REQ AM FM STEREO RADIO AND 6 DISC CD DVD CHANGER MP3 WMA AUX J ACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate C LOAD 6 DISC MP3 WMA PUSH ON PUSH AUDIO SELECT TUNE SCROLL 8189f8f9 RET Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON
83. it to your authorized dealer and have it fixed 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the driver s seat and front passenger s seat the shoul der belt can be adjusted upward or downward to posi tion the belt away from your neck Push and fully depress the button above the webbing to release the anchorage then move it up or down to the position that fits you best Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt As a guide if you are shorter than average you will 8 y 8e y prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 you will prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up and down to make sure that it is locked in position In the rear seat move toward the center of the seat to position the belt away from your neck Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the follo
84. km h Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause an accident Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four or six in case of trucks with dual rear wheels Never combine them with other types of tires Temporary use spare tires have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indica tors the temporary use spare tire needs to be Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in replaced the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare Compact Spare Tire If Equipped tire failure and loss of vehicle control The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with radial tires It is engineered to be used on your style 350 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN DO NOT install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare DO NOT install more than one compact spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance DO NOT take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the compact spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for t
85. laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered as a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA WARNING It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly On seven passenger models do not drive the vehicle with the second row passenger seat in the easy entry exit Lease seat cushion flipped upward and seat moved forward as this position is only intended for entering and exit
86. may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action e On the highways Slow down e In city traffic While stopped put the transaxle in NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition If your Air Condition ing A C system is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning off the A C system removes this heat You can also turn the Temperature control to maximum heat the Mode control to floor and the Blower control to High This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 395 CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H safely pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the A C turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the en gine OFF immediately and call for service WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call a service center if your vehicle over heats If you decide to look under the hood yourself refer to Section 7 and f
87. meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427 Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 2 4L and 2 7L Engines SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to the Engine Com partment illustration in this section Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certifi cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 3 5L Engine SAE 10W 30 engine oil is preferred for use in 3 5L Engines for all operating temperatures The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to the Engine Com partment illustration in this section Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certifi cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality req
88. must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE See 60 40 Split Second Row Passenger Seats To provide additional storage area each second row passenger seat can be folded flat This allows for ex e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area tended cargo space and still maintains some seating room inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people if needed riding in these areas are more likely to be seri NOTE Prior to folding the second row passenger seat ously injured or killed make sure the front seatback is not in a reclined position Do not allow people to ride in any area of your This will allow the seat to fold easily vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly On seven passenger models do not allow a pas senger to sit in a third row seat with the second row seatback s folded flat In a collision the passenger could slide underneath the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 To Fold the Seat 3 Lift the control lever with the other hand allow the seatback to move forward slightly
89. not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefit of Anti Lock brakes Furthermore the ABS light should be checked frequently to assure that it is operating properly If the light does not turn on have the system checked by an authorized dealer See page 328 for more information UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 23 Electronic Stability Program ESP Traction Control System TCS Indicator Light If this indicator light flashes during accelera tion ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions See page 328 for more information 24 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL This light is part of an Onboard Diagnostic t system called OBD II The OBD system monitors emissions engine and automatic transaxle con trol systems The MIL will turn on when the key is in the ON position before engine start If the MIL does not turn on when turning the key from LOCK or ACC to ON have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the MIL after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the MIL 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing If the MIL flashes when the engi
90. not over the GVWR Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR Loading To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty weight axle by axle and side by side Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible Stow all loose items securely before driving If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded either GAWR but the total load is within the specified GVWR you must redistribute the weight Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate ee STARTING AND OPERATING 377 A loaded vehicle is shown in the illustration Note that neither the GVWR nor the GAWR capacities have been exceeded EXAMPLE ONLY Front Axle Rear Axle Empty Weight 2054 Ibs 1805 Ibs 932 kg 819 kg Load including driver 271 lbs 579 Ibs passengers and cargo 123 kg 263 kg Total 2325 Ibs 2384 Ibs 1055 kg 1081 kg GAWR 2546 Ibs 2708 Ibs 1155 kg 1228 kg NOTE Refer to the Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the rear of the driver s door for your vehicle s GVWR and GAWRs This table is
91. old must ride in the front passenger s seat because the vehicle is crowded move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to information on Child Restraint in this section 5 You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 6 All occupants should use their seat belts properly 7 The driver s seat and front passenger s seat should be moved back as far as practical to allow the airbags time to inflate en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 8 Do not lean against the door as the supplemental side WARNING curtain airbags and supplemental front seat mounted side airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between ded e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more you and the door severe injuries in a collision The airbags work 9 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be with your seat belt to restrain you properly In modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all Customer Center Phone numbers are provided in the If Always wear your seat belts even though you have You Need Customer Assistance section airbags Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during airbag deployment could cause seri ous injury Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel S
92. only an example TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR 378 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN Gross Trailer Weight GTW The Gross Trailer Weight GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or temporary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination Note that GCWR ratings in clude a 150 Ib
93. or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Press the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned ON the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time Voice Recognition Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hands Free Phone UConnect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped w
94. or start the engine This means that the vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition key or start the engine This means that the vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If the OBD II system is not ready you should see an authorized dealer or repair facility If this vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive the vehicle as you normally would in order for the OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether the vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not ready if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have the vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail the vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine Mopar parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non Mopar parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty 424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M AUTHORIZED DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment t
95. plugged in and activates programming is complete If the device does not activate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels 1 Garage Door Opener 2 Training Button 6 Firmly press and release the Learn or Training button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer Gate Operator Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of NOTE There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next transmission which may not be long enough for step after the Learn button has been pressed HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator replace Programming HomeLink Step 3 with the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLi
96. position third detent When the system is on the headlight time delay feature is also on This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position To turn the Automatic System OFF turn the end of the multifunction lever out of the AUTO position NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will turn on in the automatic mode Headlights with Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned ON if the multifunction lever is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned OFF if they were turned ON by this feature The Headlights with Wipers feature can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped Refer to Headlights With Wipers under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures under Electronic Vehicle Information Center in Section 4 Headlight Time Delay If Equipped This feature is particularly useful when exiting your vehicle in an unlit area It provides the safety of headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds after turning the ignition switch to the LOCK position To activate the delay turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position while the headlights are still on Then turn OFF the headlights within 45 seconds The delay interval begin
97. single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at one time 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the Voice Recogni tion button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call While Current Call in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the PHONE button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the PHONE button
98. sore muscles and backs The heaters provide the same heat level for both cushion and back The driver s seat and front passenger s seat are heated The controls for each heater are located in the switch bank in the center of the instrument panel After turning ON the ignition you can choose from High Low or Off heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for high one for low and none for off ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 81d01a0d Heated Seat Switch Press the switch once to select high level heating Press the switch a second time to select low level heating Press the switch a third time to shut OFF the heating elements If high level heating is selected the system automatically switches to low level heating and turns one indicator light off after 30 minutes of continuous operation It will turn the heater and the remaining indicator light off after an additional 30 minutes of continuous operation If low level heating is selected the system automatically turns the heater and the indicator light off after 30 minutes of continuous operation NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes WARNING Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical condition
99. stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury Stadium Tip n Slide Easy Entry Exit Seat Seven Passenger Models This feature allows passengers to easily enter or exit the third row passenger seats from either side of the vehicle To Move the Second Row Passenger Seat Forward NOTE Raise the 20 seatback armrest before moving the 6096 seat to allow for full seat travel Move the control lever on the upper outboard side of the seatback forward and in one fluid motion the seat cushion flips upward and the seat moves forward on its tracks Tip n Slide Control Lever 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Tip n Slide Seat Grab Handle NOTE A hand grip is molded into the front of each quarter trim panel near the door opening to assist entry and exit from the third row passenger seats ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 WARNING Do not drive the vehicle with the seat in this posi tion as it is only intended for entering and exiting the third row seats Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury WARNING Be certain that the seatback and seat are locked securely into position Otherwise the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury To Unfold and Move the Second Row Passenger Seat Rearward 1 Move the se
100. the cooling system and coolant selection Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service Le vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower settings This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side win dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur EN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301 Side Window Demisters A side window demister outlet is located at each end of the instrument panel These non adjustable outlets direct air toward the side windows when the system is in the Floor Mix or Defrost mode The air is directed at the area of the windows through which you view the outside mirrors Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves
101. the right if replacing the left front fog light or to the left if replacing the right 3 Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install front fog light to allow for easier access to the front of the the replacement bulb wheel well 1 Remove the fasteners retaining the front lower wheel well access panel and remove the access panel 468 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 4 Install the bulb and connector assembly into the fog light housing and rotate the connector 1 4 turn clockwise to lock it in place 5 Reinstall the front lower wheel well access panel and fasteners Tail Stop Light Rear Turn Signal Light Tail Light Backup Light The taillights are a two piece design The tail stop lights and rear turn signal lights are located in the rear corner body panels The tail and backup lights are located in the liftgate Changing the Tail Stop Light or Rear Turn Signal Light 1 Open the liftgate 2 Remove the two fasteners from the inboard side of the taillight housing 3 Carefully insert a trim stick plastic flat blade tool between the body panel and the outboard side of the taillight housing with one hand and grasp the flange on the inboard side of the taillight housing with the other hand Use the trim stick and ha
102. through standing water This will minimize wave effects age to your vehicle s drivetrain components Al ways inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil transmission axle etc for signs of contamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not con tinue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated as this may result in further dam age Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty ee STARTING AND OPERATING 323 PARKING BRAKE WARNING The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle WARNING Never use PARK position on an automatic transaxle e Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stop ping distances Therefore after driving through standing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Getting water
103. tie downs are not safe anchors for a child e Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear seat tether strap In a sudden stop or collision a axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight tie down could pull loose and allow the child seat over or behind the rear axle can cause the vehicle to to come loose A child could be badly injured Use sway only the anchors provided for child seat tethers Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the The weight and position of cargo and passengers seatback This could impair visibility or become a can change the vehicle center of gravity and ve dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision hicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting WARNING in personal injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear e Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits de scribed on the label attached to the left door or left door center pillar cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 Retractable Cargo Area Cover If Equipped Five Passenger Models NOTE The purpose of this cover is for privacy not to secure loads It will not prevent cargo from shifting or protect passengers from loose cargo The removable retra
104. tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transaxle cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a dis charged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle This type of The battery is stored in a compartment that is located start can be dangerous if done improperly so behind the left front fender and is accessible through the follow this procedure carefully wheel well Remote jump start terminals are located in Do not use a booster battery or any other booster the engine compartment source with an output that exceeds 12 Volts A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam mable and explosive Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes 408 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 1 Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry such as watchbands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact 2 When boosting from a battery in another vehicle park that vehicle within booster cable reach but without allowing the vehicles to touch Set parking brake place automatic transaxle in PARK and turn ignition to LOCK for both vehicles WARNING Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result 3 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri
105. transaxle to assure optimum transaxle performance Use only manufacturer s recommended transmission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type It is important that the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid No chemical flushes should be used in any transaxle only the approved lubricant may be used Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transaxle The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals Front and Rear Wheel Bearings Front and rear wheel bearings are permanently sealed No regular maintenance is required for these compo nents 7 452 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or col
106. turned off until the pointer drops back e to normal turn the engine off immediately and into the normal range If the pointer remains on the call for service See page 394 for more information H and you hear continuous chimes turn the en NOTE As the coolant temperature gauge approaches gine OFF immediately and call for service H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H In this case the indicator light will flash continuously and a continuous chime will sound until the engine is allowed to cool Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H safely pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself refer to Section 7 and follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph 5 Front Fog Light Indicator Light If Equipped O This light shows when the fog lights are ON See page 148 for more information 6 Low Fuel Warning Light This indicator lights when the fuel level drops to approximately one eighth tank See page 372 for more information UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 7 Turn Signal Indicator Light amp
107. use this feature press and release the unlock button on the transmitter and then immediately press and hold the unlock button until the windows lower to the level desired or until they lower completely Programming Additional Transmitters Refer to Sentry Key Customer Key Programming See page 17 for more information If you do not have a programmed transmitter contact your authorized dealer for details Transmitter Battery Service The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery NOTE e Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate e Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board 1 Battery access is through a door located on the rear of the fob Insert a small flat blade screwdriver into the slot and gently pry open the access door 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee BATTERY ACCESS DOOR 81bb1827 Battery Replacement 2 Remove and replace the batteries Avoid touching the new batteries with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 Reposition the access door panel over the battery opening and snap into place General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interfere
108. vehicle sensitive emer gency locking mode 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if so equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbag This vehicle has front airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s airbag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s fr
109. your tires is significantly under inflated Accord ingly when the low tire pressure telltale light illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to over heat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety The TPMS has been optimized for the original of reasons including the installation of replaceme
110. 0 Engine Qil sosy eteri gehe nb E de 424 Power Steering llle 436 476 EOS s raerce dX eq oca p VR Paca wd 3 Ra 474 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 474 Fog Light Service irae RR REDE Eee 467 Fog Lights 509 Leser mw 146 148 207 467 Folding Front Passenger Seat 128 Folding Rear Seat lille 141 134 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle sss 410 Front Wheel Bearings 0000005 451 Fuel ie taro aie Cedere unm RE ae ea aed 368 Adding 504 INDEX ae Additives siens Gate cr Sce Ee ades 371 Clean Ait irs ac binibirit erie RARE 369 COTnSerVIDE exceed Ae b eR HERES 226 Ethanol 42 25 92 v9 e gone 369 Filler Cap Gas Cap acceso trie eas 372 Gasoline ee esee ed ree unes 368 Gage sara tlhe a th ae ae dE Ru eae a 205 HOSES ac0 itan bade be eb ord wed a cs 446 Materials Added 0 205 ee Rees 371 Methanol ce IR re wes ee erg 369 Octane Rating osse ro eren 368 474 Requirements soc cig seva ok e dee tak ss 368 Saver Mod esee esa en 226 Specifications 06 464 e di Eae a X PE AY S 474 Tank Capacity reu RE riia to ER RAS 472 Fuel Flexible See Flexible Fuel Vehicles Fuel System Caution 00000000 373 Eueling eue O54 eer XR HRK SUPE EX 372 FUSES acies dose oa sg thas deg n eic s 457 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 163 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 372421 Gas Gauge Fuel Gauge 00 205 Gasoline
111. 00 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEM li Sales Code REN Multimedia System It Equipped eee c iren Rar dea hrs Operating Instructions Satellite Radio If Equipped 12er erh pated EUER Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped Operating Instructions Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped Clock Setting Procedure lll Sales Code REQ AM FM Stereo Radio And 6 Disc CD DVD Changer MP3 WMA AUX Jack sese Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operation Instructions Disc Mode For CD And MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD Video 247 Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files 249 List Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play sition dA ed tots ea od ome YS eS 251 Info Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play seco acie HERE eo ea EEE ELE 251 lll Sales Code RES AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack sich ee 254 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 254 Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MPS Andie Play 22x 49 EYE Ra 260 Notes On Playing MP3 Files 262 List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 265 Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 265 en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 li Sales Code REU Multimedia System If Equipped Operating Instructions Satelli
112. 1 Open the glove box and remove all contents 2 Push the retaining tab on each side of the glove box inward while gently pulling the glove box door outward until both tabs clear the door opening in the instrument panel ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435 Glove Box Removal A C Air Filter Replacement 7 3 Pivot the glove box downward 5 Remove the A C air filter by pulling it straight out of the housing 4 Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter cover to the HVAC housing and remove the cover 6 Install the A C air filter with the arrow on the filter pointing toward the floor When installing the filter cover make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the cover 436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION The A C air filter is labeled with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through the filter Failure to install the filter properly will result in the need to replace it more often 7 Reinstall the glove box door Make sure that the hinges are seated fully as you raise the door Otherwise the door latch will not align properly Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer No chemical flushes should be used in any power steer
113. 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at e www techauthority com DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance 494 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking tracti
114. 23 E 10 Amp Left Horn Red M24 25 Amp Rear Wiper ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 463 Cavity er T Description Cavity Bd ae Description M25 _ 20 Amp Fuel Pump Diesel M31 o 20 Amp Back Up Lights Yellow Lift Pump Yellow M26 10Amp Power MIRRORS M32 Em 10 Amp Occupant Restraint Red Switch Drivers Win Red Controller ORC dow Switch M33 10Amp NGC Powertrain M27 10 Amp Steering Column Red Control Module Bat Red Lock Wireless Igni tery Feed tion Node WIN M34 10 Amp Power Assist Module M28 10Amp NGC Powertrain Red HVAC Module Head m Red Control Module I lamp Washers Com Transmission Feed pass Module if Batt equipped Flashlight M29 i0Amp Occupant Classifica if equipped Red tion Module OCM M35 m 10 Amp Heated Mirrors if M30 15 Amp Rear Wiper Module Red equipped Blue Module Power Fold M36 m 20 Amp Power Outlet 3 ing Mirror Yellow Batt 464 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavit Cartridge Mini Description K6 u Electric Back Light Y Fuse Fuse P EBL Relay M37 10Amp Anti Lock Brake Sys K7 Red tem ABS Electronic K8 Stability Program mE ESP STOP LIGHT K9 Rear Blower Relay Switch K10 u v d ue for M38 25 Amp Lock Unlock Motors T RAS 5 o NN Kil Radiator Fan Relay Natural Low Speed K1 Ig
115. 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Don t drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h ee STARTING AND OPERATING 349 Radial Ply Tires vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein WARNING stalled at the first opportunity WARNING e Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only With these tires DO NOT drive more than 50 mph 80
116. 6 307 Starting Procedures 307 Steering Column Loek quce ane het 4 eae oed ow eate 157 Linkage eter rendue uec eS EE 437 POWGE 54 4 30 toimet dedu edendo artes 336 436 Tilt Columi iuueLnooexxe3eaaceG 4 RR cea 157 Wheel Tt 2 4 0 vue qme HE ue hs 157 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls a ss eb rh PELA n Re 282 Storage a Soha ghost eg eh 180 464 Storage BIN x coo me reed eee Sur dre eee ads 180 Storage Vehicl 2 2545 e a ee esau 300 St ck Freeing iusso er meth bat 410 oun ROOF ereere saatis dea dada gia RE CE ERES 170 Sun Visor Extension sree 0 0 00 0 cece nee 91 Sunglasses Storage ceara so diirai e eee 163 Sunroof Maintenance llis 173 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 50 Sway Control Trailer isses 335 379 Synthetic Engine Oil sisse eie oen 427 System Navigation aeaea aa eee 266 System Remote Starting 000 27 Tachometer i bem RR eed 208 Tai Sts aue ades eyes 468 Telescoping Steering Column 157 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 293 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 205 Tether Anchor Child Restraint ZI Theft Alarm Security Alarm sess 18 Theft System Security Alarm 18 Tie Down Hooks Cargo iles 189 Tilt Steering Column ossis deiina eai ii 157 Time Delay Headlight 04 147 jn MM FER 14 10 516 INDEX EBENEN Tire and Loading In
117. 65 Data Parameters that May Be Recorded Diagnostic trouble code s and warning light status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system Airbag disable light status if equipped lime of airbag deployment in terms of ignition cycles and vehicle mileage Airbag deployment level if applicable Impact acceleration and angle Seat belt status Brake status service and parking brakes Accelerator status including vehicle speed Engine control status including engine speed Transaxle gear selection e Cruise control status e Traction stability control status e Tire Pressure Monitoring System status if equipped LEN Child Restraint Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time including babies and children Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING Infants and Child Restraints In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a missile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could
118. 8 When setting the variance the numbering will wrap around from Zone 15 to Zone 1 Calibrating the Compass Mid Line Cluster Only If the compass appears erratic inaccurate or abnormal you may wish to calibrate it However prior to calibrat ing the compass make sure the proper Compass Variance value is selected NOTE The shift lever must be in PARK to enter the Calibration mode To calibrate the compass first start the engine Next press and hold the COMPASS TEMPERATURE DIS PLAY button until the current variance zone number displays approximately 10 seconds Then press and hold the button again until the direction displays with the CAL indicator on continuously approximately 10 en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 seconds Finally drive the vehicle in one or more com plete circles at speeds under 5 mph 8 km h in an area free from power lines and large metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now func tion normally ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC IF EQUIPPED The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display It is located in the instrument cluster below the fuel and temperature gauges Vehicles equipped with steering wheel mounted buttons described in this section are also equipped with the EVIC The EVIC consists of the following EVIC e Compass display e Outside temperature display e Trip
119. After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has the factory trained technicians and genuine Mopar parts and is interested in your satisfaction HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire The detailed Index at the back of this manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual INTRODUCTION 5 i Od Xt d e omm ELECTRONIC STABILITY WATER IN FUEL REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD WIPER EXTERIOR BULB HIGH BEAM TURN SIGNALS UPPER AIR HEATED SEAT DOOR LOCK ADJUSTABLE ELECTRONIC PROGRAM BRAKE WIPER INTERMITTENT FAILURE OUTLET LOW PEDALS SPEED CONTROL ASSIST SYSTEM BRAKE M d 4 pe gt l a E g z Q B OR g X D g BRAKE SYSTEM FUEL REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD MASTER LIGHTING LOW BEAM KEY ACTIVATE UPPER AND LOWER HEATED SEAT WINDOW LIFT TIRE PRESSURE HILLDESCENT WARNING PARKING INTERMITTENT WIPER WASHER SWITCH POWER OUTLET AIR OUTLET HIGH MONITOR CONTROL BRAKE E vt een C lw 4 oU 2 4 mw E LF FUEL FILL SIDE REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD WASHER DOME LIGHT FRONT FOG
120. And Tire Changing 396 Jack Location ecrane assa sina canna ii 396 opare Tire LocatiOn c gt esce b RD Ren 397 Preparations For Jacking 397 Spare Tire Removal 04 397 Spare Tir SOWA ss scd neoces Pa ae eas 399 Jacking Instructions B Jump Starting Procedures lll Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ll Towing A Disabled Vehicle Without The Ignition Key Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flat Towing With The Key In The Ignition And AII Four Wheels On The Ground Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With A Tow Dolly 394 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME HAZARD WARNING FLASHER The HAZARD switch is located in the instrument panel switch bank above the climate controls Push and release the switch to turn on the hazard warning flashers When the hazard warning is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Push and release the switch a second time to turn off the flashers This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the hazard warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition switch is in the LOCK position NOTE With extended use the hazard warning flashers
121. CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file 252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the use
122. CTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of this vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration For states that require an Inspection and Mainte nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if the vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test the vehicle may fail the test This vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if this vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Insert the ignition key into the ignition switch 2 Turn the ignition to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 3 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 4 As soon as you turn the ignition key to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423 5 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition key
123. Connect Phonebook e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All e The UConnect system will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE SSS e After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted e Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted List All Names in the UConnect Phonebook e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names e The UConnect system will play the names of all the phonebook entries To call one of the names in the list press the Voice Recognition button during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point e The UConnect system will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the UConnect system if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellular service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the UConnect system Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a ca
124. D OD GE OWNER S MANUAL 2009 jOURNEY VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution therefor DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation WARNING Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or op tional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previ ously manufactured Copyright 2008 Chrysler LLC TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION iei t
125. ENT PANEL 277 VES with Rear HVAC Controls e The touch screen radio and DVD player controls allow front seat operation for easy setup in the case of younger rear seat passengers e A battery powered infrared remote control that snaps into a molded compartment in the center console Two wireless infrared headsets allow rear seat passen gers to listen to the same or individual audio sources Audio Video RCA Jacks AUX Jacks on the rear of the center console enable the monitor to display video directly from a video camera connect video games for display on the screen or play music directly from an MP3 player 1 Video in yellow 2 Left audio in white 3 Right audio in red NOTE Refer to your Video Entertainment System VES User Manual for detailed operating instruc tions 278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEM UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE UCI IF EQUIPPED NOTE This section is for sales code RES REL and REQ RET radios only with UConnect For sales code REN REZ touch screen radio and REU REX RE1 radio refer to the separate User s Manual This feature allows you to plug an iPod mobile digital device into the vehicle s sound system through a connec tor UCI connector using an optional connection cable available through MOPAR See your authorized dealer for details Using this feature e the iPod audio can be played on the vehicle s sound system providing metadata
126. ENU button until Personal Settings displays in the EVIC 3 Press the SCROLL button until CALIBRATE COM PASS displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the RESET button to start the cali bration The message CAL will display in the EVIC 5 Slowly complete one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message turns off The compass will now function normally UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic North and geographic North To allow the compass module to compensate for that difference and ensure accuracy you can set the variance in the compass module to the zone where the vehicle is located according to the Compass Variance Map To set the variance perform the following steps NOTE e The default variance setting is Zone 8 When setting the variance the numbering will wrap around from Zone 15 to Zone 1 e Magnetic materials should be kept away from the top of the instrument panel as this is where the compass sensor is located 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee 1 Turn the ignition switch ON 2 Press and release the MENU button until Personal Settings displays in the EVIC 3 Press the SCROLL button until COMPASS VARI ANCE message and the last variance zone number displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release RESET button until the proper variance
127. ERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se MPEG Specification Sampling Frequency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio 112 96 80 64 Layer 3 25 2208 10 56 48 40 39 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265 LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down
128. F EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel The left and right hand controls are rocker type switches with a pushbutton in the center of each switch Reach behind the steering wheel to access the switches en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283 Left Hand Switch Functions for Radio Operation e Press the top of the switch to SEEK the next listenable station up from the current setting e Press the bottom of the switch to SEEK the next listenable station down from the current setting e Press the button in the center of the switch to tune to s the next preset that you have programmed BACK VIEW OF Left Hand Switch Functions for Media i e CD STEERING WHEEL Operation 818fcae7 e Press the top of the switch once to listen to the next track Remote Sound Controls Right Hand Switch Functions e Press the bottom of the switch once either to listen to the beginning of the current track or to listen to the e Press the bottom of the switch to decrease the volume beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play e Press the top of the switch to increase the volume e Press the button in the center of the switch to change modes i e AM FM etc 284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee e Press the switch up or down twice to listen to the second track three times to listen to the third track and so forth e
129. G AND OPERATING e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings V The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will d illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pres sures the system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Check TPMS Warning
130. ING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever upward or downward and the corresponding turn signal indicator on the instru ment panel will flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights 81f4ecOb Front Fog Light NOTE The front fog lights will only operate with the headlights on low beam Selecting high beam headlights will turn off the front fog lights Turn Signal Control 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ge You can signal a lane change by moving the lever upward or downward partially without moving beyond the de tent NOTE If either turn signal indicator has a very fast flash rate check for an inoperative outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved see your authorized dealer for service Highbeam Lowbeam Select Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to HIGH beam Pull the Lever toward you to switch the headlights back to LOW beam 81f4ec14 Highbeam Control Flash to Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and remain on until the lever is released ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 NOTE If the multifunction lever is held in the Flash to Pass position for more than 15 seconds the high beams will shut off If this occurs
131. INSTRUMENT PANEL 269 3 If Time Setup is highlighted on the menu press and release the joystick in the center of the radio Otherwise turn the knob surrounding the joystick to select Time Setup and then press and release the joystick 4 Turn the knob surrounding the joystick to scroll to Daylight Savings and then press and release the joystick 5 If the desired setting has a check mark next to it proceed to the next step Otherwise turn the knob surrounding the joystick to select Off or On and then press and release the joystick A check mark will display next to the selection 6 Press and release the SETUP button to exit the screen Setting the User Clock If you wish to set the clock to a time different from the system clock you can manually adjust the time by performing the following NOTE You can skip Steps 2 and 3 by pressing and holding the TIME button on the radio for three sec onds 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Press and release the SETUP button on the radio 3 If Time Setup is highlighted on the menu press and release the joystick in the center of the radio Otherwise turn the knob surrounding the joystick to select Time Setup and then press and release the joystick 270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 4 If User Time has a check mark next to it proceed to the next step Otherwise turn the knob surrounding the joystick to scroll to User Time and then press and
132. If Equipped 92 Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror lll Hands Free Communication UConnect If It Equipped eor ree RR oa al 89 Equipped 4i ucesGueaue kde web RE 93 Outside Mirrors tenisit tedes nr er utaya 89 Op ratioftk esea a ea pE oye E 95 Outside Mirrors Folding Feature Phone Call Features 00 102 lee ae een d UConnect System Features 105 Power Remote Control Mirrors 90 Advanced Phone Connectivity 110 Dave hoe con Things You Should Know About Your If Equipped ii sess RR Ee ae ea a 91 UConnect System 22 eeeeeeee 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee General Information 00 li Voice Recognition System If Equipped Voice Recognition System VR Operation Commands iam 2 pae aea x Phe AE Manual Front Seat Adjustments Power Seat If Equipped Head Restraints 0 00000000 e Heated Seats If Equipped 60 40 Split Second Row Passenger Seats 50 50 Split Third Row Passenger Seats With Fold Flat Feature Seven Passenger Models ll To Open And Close The Hood 144 NL ork puhee KER eae EEE 146 Exterior And Interior Lighting Control 146 Headlights And Parking Lights
133. LIGHT HOOD RELEASE LOWER AIR RECIRCULATION CONVERTIBLE TRACTION ALL WHEEL FAILURE OF ANTI LOCK WASHER FLUID LEVEL OUTLET 4WINDOW DOWN CONTROL DRIVE BRAKING SYSTEM ea D pe ry YA 3 00 t p 4WD BRAKE WINDSHIELD LIFTGATE RELEASE ELECTRONIC BRAKE SYSTEM ENGINE OIL REAR WINDOW ELECTRICALLY PARK LIGHTS REAR FOG LAMP AND LIFTGATE DEFROST AND VENTILATING FAN WINDOW LOCK THROTTLE FOUR WHEEL WARNING PARKING DEFROST HEATED OPEN LOWER AIR OUTLET CONTROL DRIVE BRAKE fun Q P Hi a TOW LJ bo HAUL VOICE BATTERY HEATED MIRROR WINDSHIELD INSTUMENT PANEL SEAT BELT SLIDING DOOR TRUNK DECK AIR CONDITIONING CHILD SEAT RECOGNITION WARNING TOW HAUL CHARGING DEFROST ILLUMINATION RELEASE TETHER ANCHOR BUTTON BUM 5 mri 9 A j e uy 00 S t C a J mam LOW LOWER ANCHORS GLOW PLUG POWER WINDSHIELD WIPER SIDE AIRBAG AIRBAG SLIDING DOOR EMERGENCY LIGHTER AND TETHER FOR UCONNECT HAZARD FOUR WHEEL STEERING FLUID AND WASHER RELEASE HANDLE CHILDREN LATCH BUTTON DRIVE LOW C B E RIRBRG Aa gaa ei be i poh n MALFUNCTION TRANS ENGINE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL PASSENGER DOOR AJAR CONVERTIBLE CONVERTIBLE HORN SEE OWNER S 81910970 INDICATOR LIGHT OIL TEMP TEMPERATURE RESTRAINT SYSTEM AIRBAG OFF TOP DOWN TOP UP MANUAL ISO 6 INTRODUCTION EE WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result
134. MA files named with the MP3 WMA extension may cause play back problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 WMA and will not play the file When using the MP3 WMA encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 WMA file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 WMA files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling Specification Frequency kHz Bit Rate ebps 320 256 224 MPEG 1 Audio 192 160 128 Layer 3 ASH OA 332 95 80 64 56 48 160 128 144 MPEG Audio 24 2205 16 112 96 80 64 T 56 48 WMA Sampling Specification Frequency kHz Bit Rate kbps 48 64 96 128 WMA 44 1 and 48 160 192 VBR ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for ID3 version 1 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251 Playback of MP3 WMA Files When a medium containing MP3 WMA data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 WMA files Loading times for playback of MP3 WMA files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than
135. NDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Battery Saver Feature To protect the battery the interior lights will turn off automatically within 10 minutes of turning the ignition switch to the LOCK position This will occur if the interior lights were switched ON manually or are on because a door is open Dimmer Control The Dimmer Control is part of the multifunction lever It controls the operation of the interior lights and the brightness of the instrument panel lights 81f4ecid Dimmer Control Instrument Panel Dimming With the parking lights or headlights on rotate the Dimmer Control upward or downward to change the brightness of the instrument panel lights UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 Parade Mode Daytime Brightness Feature WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Rotate the Dimmer Control to the first detent to brighten X The Windshield Wiper Washer control lever is S located on the right side of the steering column the odometer and radio display when the parking lights or headlights are on during daylight conditions Interior Light ON Rotate the Dimmer Control completely upward to the second detent to turn ON the interior lights NOTE The Battery Saver feature will not activate until the ignition switch is in the LOCK position Refer to Battery Saver Feature for additional information Interior Light Defeat OFF Rotate the Dimmer Control completely downward to the O OFF position The interior light
136. NG YOUR VEHICLE 13 Fob With Integrated Key The Fob with Integrated Key operates the ignition switch It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE trans mitter and a valet key which stores in the rear of the Fob The valet key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the Fob go dead You can keep the valet key with you when valet parking To remove the valet key from the Fob slide the mechani cal latch at the top of the Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out of the Fob with your other hand 81bb182d Valet Key Removal NOTE e You can insert the double sided valet key into the lock cylinder with either side up e Only the drivers door is equipped with a lock cylinder 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Tip Start Feature Do not press the accelerator Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running Ignition Key Removal Place the shift lever in PARK Turn the key to the LOCK position and then remove the key NOTE e For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and ignition powered power outlets will remain active for approximately 45 seconds after the ignition switch i
137. NGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge you to follow the manufacturer s directions carefully when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that are provided with the child restraint system e e ushion seatback and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces The lower anchors are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the In addition there are tether strap anchors located behind each rear seatback near to the floor Tether Strap Anchors Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchor and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a 81ddf905 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EE hook for attachment to the tether strap anchor and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the ve
138. NOT spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck and don t let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced _ TREAD WEAR INDICATOR 352 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this point Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu factur
139. Onboard Diagnostic System 421 422 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 163 Operating Precautions 005 421 Outside Rearview Mirrors 00 89 Overdrive so ia eh ee de n RU aa 208 315 Overhead Console i022 dees Rega 162 Overheating Engine 206 394 395 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 492 Paint Care 52 200 wr Rr PPP LEPT 452 Panic Alarm ives eee rk e n 24 Parking Brake 2s see ee men 323 Parking On Hill 2 ee 323 Passenger Seat Back Tilt Easy Entry System 139 Passing Light sse ciere ae RAE 150 Personal Settings Lets nx oe Aes 230 Pets apas bre e eed egna She Gav oe ES pd E 77 NENNEN INDEX 511 Phone Cellular 93 266 267 Phone Hands Free UConnect 93 266 267 Placard Tire and Loading Information 341 Port Universal Serial Bus USB 234 266 LEE gee me Merle E vu ern Pe gee 234 266 Power Brakes 242330 RE BGC hoe age d an eA d 326 Distribution Center Fuses 457 Door LOCKS 3er CES OR Ret ee EA 30 WAV GRTOR MT TT 176 MitTOIS 4 94 06 gocexg edo penam OS px ee PER RS 90 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 174 Seals eua Ue Nu dox RUN Oe A BS A a 129 Steering vi Soa seg d eee a adta areri is 336 Steering Checkig sessi n set 436 SUNTOOL 1299 besdua 6k de AG EX Pa eA E 170 Wind Ow uus d ead acr Eu BR dece 34 Windows Express Down 04 4 25 P
140. Pillar Location 498 INDEX MM Brake Assist System 330 Brake Assist Warning Light 216 Brake Control System Electronic 328 Brake Fluid i2 0534 45 30 44g eG Ee doe RS 476 Brake Parking 5a sese cette REOR RR eR 323 Brake System iussus e ree e 326 446 Anti Lock ABS 0 2 05 327 328 Plaid Gheck 225 od 46 954 44 bo XT Sex 447 476 Hoses seid ax ann ums ERR SEE Eyes 446 Master Cylinder eres rele d 447 Parkitig uro oe app i e iE eite e Rai S 323 Warming Light 4222 25 R9 ELA E eh ps 217 Brak S 4 44 uos Re ERR BEP 326 446 Brake Transaxle Interlock ls 312 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 77 Brightness Interior Lights 152 Bulb Replacement ce pessssss iausir essi 465 466 Bulbs Light sese sernai aa aE 81 465 Calibration Compass 00004 219 228 Camera Rear 2 1 eee 92 Capacities Fluid bed sauce ees bates 472 Caps Filler UC scorn esac opens inam ene aac viet 372 Oil Engine 00000 418 419 420 427 Radiator Coolant Pressure 442 Cat Washes siege pete ae deeds woes 452 Carbon Monoxide Warning 79 372 Cargo Area Cover 44 3040 anre ex Goats 191 Cargo Area Features selecte sais neepa ciaee 188 Cargo Compartment 000000000 188 Light ge dec Giese dea oe os es 151 188 Luggage Carrier ni osu oak RE Re 196 Cargo Light csse Re mnn 151 Cargo Load Floor 1 0 6 6 cece ee
141. R INSTRUMENT PANEL MEM FM Reception Because FM transmission is based on frequency varia tions interference that consists of amplitude variations can be filtered out leaving the reception relatively clear which is the major feature of FM radio NOTE e For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the radio and steering wheel radio controls if equipped will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the radio and steering wheel radio controls if equipped will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is program mable For details refer to Key Off Power Delay under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter EVIC in Section 4 SALES CODE REN MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate The REN Multimedia system contains a radio CD DVD player USB port a 30 gigabyte hard drive HDD and a JukeBox virtual CD changer Sirius Satellite Radio is optional The 6 5 in 16 5 cm touch screen allows for easy menu selection A 30 gigabyte HDD allows uploads of music and photos from CDs or through the USB por
142. RTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Administra tor NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 492 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard America
143. Steering Fluid Check 436 Front Suspension Ball Joints 437 Steering Linkages ras sese 437 Body Lubrication vx RR ERES 437 Wiper Blades oes cree ERR PES 437 Windshield Washers Rear Window Washer 438 ExhaustSystem i o e nn 439 Cooling System ees 440 Hoses And Vacuum Vapor Harnesses 445 F el System 5044498 ree eae a ena Ys 446 Brake System cesa cese ncaa de dec s ore 446 Automatic Transaxle yass aieri i 449 Front And Rear Wheel Bearings Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Cleaning The Cupholders ll Fuses Totally Integrated Power Module li Vehicle Storage lll Replacement Bulbs ll Bulb Replacement Low Beam Headlight High Beam Headlight Front Turn Signal Park Light Side Marker Light Front Fog Light Tail Stop Light Rear Turn Signal Light Tail Light Backup Light ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417 License Plate Light lessen 470 Epit ios Eug ia SAYS eae eae E Vas 474 ll Fluids And Capacities 00 0 472 GEEK 476 Bi Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 474 418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 2 4L ENGINE COMPARTMENT NM x pM i uu m 16 81f4d76d 1 Coolant Bottle 8 Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post 2 Engine Coolant Reservoir 9 Remote Jump Start Negative Post 3 Power Steering Fluid 10
144. Storage Bin with Removable Liner i i d a i Retamers If Equippe NOTE Position the front seat to at least a mid track A map storage pocket and grocery retainers are located position to provide easier access to the storage bin on the back of the drivers seatback An in floor storage bin is located behind each front seat Each 1 6 gal 5 9 1 bin can hold up to 12 12 oz 0 35 1 cans plus ice or other items The removable bin liner allows for easy filling emptying and cleaning 1 Grocery Retainers 2 Map Storage ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 The liner can be removed for easy cleaning by lifting on the notches as shown In Floor Storage Bin To access the bin position the floor mat aside if o d equipped Pull the door latch release loop upward to Removable Liner release the latch and then forward to open the bin door 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee CARGO AREA FEATURES Rechargeable Flashlight If Equipped The rechargeable LED flashlight stores in its charging station in the left rear quarter trim panel To remove it press on the indent on the side of the flashlight and release Rechargeable Flashlight NOTE Be sure to return the flashlight to its charging station when not in use to ensure it is ready for operation the next time you need it Cargo Management System Five Passenger System Features e A raised load floor that sits on top of a large b
145. The left or right arrow will flash in unison with the corresponding front and rear turn signal lights when the turn signal switch is operated See page 149 for more information NOTE A chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mi 1 6 km with either turn signal on NOTE Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate 8 High Beam Indicator Light This light shows that the headlights are on high g beam Pull the multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column toward you to switch to low beam See page 150 for more information 9 Speedometer Shows the vehicle speed 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEM 10 Vehicle Security Alarm VSA Indicator Light If Equipped This light will flash rapidly for approximately 16 seconds when the vehicle Security system is arming and then flash slowly when the system is armed The light will also turn on for about three seconds when the ignition switch is first turned ON See page 18 for more information 11 All Wheel Drive AWD Failure Indicator Light If Equipped This light monitors the All Wheel Drive AWD system The light will turn on for a bulb check when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as three seconds When lit solid There is an AWD system fault AWD performance will be at a reduced level Service the AWD system soon AWD When blinking T
146. To remove the slack from the lap belt pull upward on e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat the shoulder portion of the seat belt 022605394 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug WARNING as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or Improper installation can lead to failure of an slouching can move the belt out of position infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex actly when installing an infant or child restraint If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind fee pack A rearward facing child restraint should only be used in a rear seat A rearward facing child re NOTE For additional information refer to straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy fatal injury to the infant ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraint e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards We also recommend that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it e The restraint must be app
147. Track Title Artist Al bum etc information display on radio e the iPod can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play Browse and List the iPod contents e the iPod battery charges when plugged into the UCI connector Connecting The iPod Device Use the optional connection cable to connect an iPod to the vehicle s UCI connector which is located in the glove box or center console on some vehicles This location may vary with vehicle Once the iPod is connected and synchronized to the vehicle system this may take a few seconds to connect the vehicle brand logo appears on the iPod display and it starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches as described below Controlling The iPod Using Radio Buttons To get into the UCI iPod9 mode and access a connected iPod press the AUX button on the radio faceplate Once in the UCI iPod mode the iPod audio track if available from iPod will start playing over the vehicle audio system ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279 Play Mode When switched to UCI mode the iPod will be in Play mode In Play mode you may use the following buttons on the radio faceplate to control the iPod and display data TunelScroll Knob Use the Tune Scroll knob to go to the next or previous track The Tune Scroll knob functions similar to the scroll wheel on the iPod mobile digital device Turning it clockwise forward by one click while playing a tr
148. UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm Illuminated Approach If Equipped This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the EVIC Refer to Illumin Approach under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 To Lock the Doors and Liftgate Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to lock all doors and liftgate The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Sound Horn with Lock under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press the LOCK button on a programmed transmitter for at least four seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press the PANIC button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pr
149. ack skips to the next track Turning it counterclockwise backward by one click during the first two seconds of the track will jump to the previous track in the list and turning this button at any other time in the track will jump to the beginning of the current track RW Rewind Button Press and hold the RW button to move backward in the current track Holding the RW button long enough will take you back to the beginning of the current track Pressing and releasing the RW button will go back five seconds of the current track FF Fast Forward Button Press and hold the FF button to move forward in the current track Pressing and releasing the FF button will go forward five seconds of the current track SEEK Buttons Use the SEEK buttons to move to the previous or the next track If the left down button is pressed during the first two seconds of the current track it will go back to the 280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEM previous track in the list if you press this button at any other time in the current track it will go back to the beginning of the track If the right up button is pressed during Play mode it will go to the next track in the list INFO Button Press the INFO button while a track is playing to see the information Track Title Artist Album etc for that track Each press of the INFO button will take you to the next screen of data for that track Once you have seen all of the screens th
150. age at least once a month It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and cargo area be kept clear and open If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos sible The cost of such repairs is considered the respon sibility of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel 454 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e Use Mopar touch up paint on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use Mopar Wheel Cleaner 05066247AB or equivalent or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only Mopar or equivalent is recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use ac
151. ain menu Memo To switch to the voice recorder mode say MEMO In this mode you may say the following commands NEW MEMO to record a new memo During the recording you may press the VR hard key to stop recording You continue by saying one of the following commands SAVE to save the memo CONTINUE to continue recording DELETE to delete the recording PLAY MEMOS to play previously recorded memos During the playback you may press the VR hard key to stop playing memos You continue by saying one of the following commands REPEAT to repeat a memo NEXT to play the next memo 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M PREVIOUS to play the previous memo DELETE to delete a memo e DELETE ALL to delete all memos NOTE Keep in mind that you have to press the VR hard key first and wait for the beep before speaking the barge in commands Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the UConnect system Voice Training feature may be used 1 Press the VR hard key speak System Setup and once you are in that menu then speak Voice Training This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recognition 2 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the UConnect System For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windo
152. ain to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the Tune Scroll control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types Program Type M m No program type or un PP dette None Adult Hits Adlt Hit Classical Classicl Classic Rock Cls Rock College College Country Country 258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEM Program Type 16 m Program Type 16 DP Foreign Language Language Sports Sports Information Inform Talk Talk Jazz Jazz Top 40 Top 40 News News Weather Weather Nostalgia Nostalga By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon Oldies Oldies is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency Personality Persnlty station with the same selected Music Type name The Public Public Music Type function only operates when in the FM Rhythm and Blues R amp B mode Religious Music Rel Musc If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Religious Talk Rel Talk Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be Rock Rock exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SOR BOR SETUP Button Soft Rock Soft Rck Pressing the SETUP b
153. al information FIG 2 WITH WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION CORRECT 81811965 Weight Distributing Hitch System EN STARTING AND OPERATING 381 EXAMPLE ONLY FIG 3 IMPROPER ADJUSTMENT INCORRECT 8181f96f Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing System Trailer Hitch Classification Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2 000 Ibs 907 kg with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package See your authorized dealer for package content The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions Class Max Trailer Hitch Industry Standards Class I Light Duty 2 000 Ibs 907 kg Class II Medium Duty 3 500 Ibs 1587 kg Class III Heavy Duty 5 000 Ibs 2268 kg Class IV Extra Heavy 10 000 Ibs 4540 kg Duty Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle 382 STARTING AND OPERATING EE Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Trans
154. allation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interfer ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS Chrysler LLC Rh 81 226 0910 Fourth Edition Printed in U S A
155. allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to resist damage The hinge has three detent positions forward rearward and normal Power Remote Control Mirrors The power MIRROR switch is located on driver s door trim panel 81410601 Power MIRROR Switches Models without Express Window Feature Press the mirror SELECT button marked L or R and then press one of the four arrow buttons to move the mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 Models with Express Window Feature Press and release the mirror SELECT button marked L or R and then press one of the four arrow buttons to move the mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing The selection times out after 30 seconds of inactivity in order to guard against accidentally changing a mirror position following an adjustment Heated Remote Control Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the Electric Rear Window Defroster Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor downward and swing the mirror cover upward The light will turn on automati cally Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light z81f4d169 Illuminated Vanity Mirror Sun Visor Slide On Rod Feature If Equipped This feature allows for additional flexibility in position
156. als and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insurance organizations In the event that an investigation is undertaken by the manufacturer of this vehicle regardless of initiative the company or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the electronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction i e pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases such as those maintained by the U S govern ment and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver ve hicle or crash will be treated confidentially Confidential data will not be disclosed by the manufacturer of this vehicle to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of litigation involving a product of the manufacturer of this vehicle 3 Requested by police under a legal warrant 4 Otherwise required by law ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
157. also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection While the seat belts are designed to protect you in many types of collisions the front airbags will deploy in moderate to severe frontal collisions The supplemental side curtain airbag and supplemental front seat mounted side airbag on the crash side of the vehicle will also trigger in moderate to severe side collisions However even in collisions where the airbags deploy you need the seat belts to keep you in the correct position for the airbags to protect you properly 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years old and younger should ride buck led up in the rear seat WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in that position 2 Children who are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Refer to information on Child Restraint in this section 3 Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buck led up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm 4 If a child from 1 to 12 years
158. amage to the transaxle may occur if the following before shifting into any driving gear precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal ee STARTING AND OPERATING 309 Normal Starting Tip Start NOTE Normal Starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal Do not press the accelerator Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the normal starting procedure Extremely Cold Weather Below 20 F or 29 C To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended 310 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN If Engine Fails To Start If th
159. and then release the lever WARNING To prevent personal injury or damage to objects 1 Locate the control lever on the lower outboard side of the seat keep your head arms and objects out of the folding path of the seatback 4 Gently guide the seatback into the folded position To Unfold the Seat Raise the seatback and lock it in place Seatback Release 2 Place one hand on the seatback and apply a gentle pressure 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Be certain that the seatback is locked securely into position Otherwise the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury Forward and Rearward Adjustment The control lever is on the outboard side of the seat Lift the lever to move the seat forward or rearward Release the lever once the seat is in the position desired Then using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched Manual Seat Adjustment ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be adjusted properly and you could be injured Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked Recliner Adjustment The control lever is on the outboard side of the seat To
160. ar seat covers not designated for the specific model being re paired Always use the correct seat cover specified for the vehicle 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING NOTE A frontal collision that is not severe enough to need airbag protection will not activate the system This Unapproved modifications or service procedures to does not mean something is wrong with the airbag the front seat assembly its related components or System seat cover may inadvertently change the airbag de If you do have a collision that deploys the airbags any or ployment in case of a frontal crash This could result all of the following may occur in death or serious injury to the driver or front seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an accident A modified vehicle may not comply with required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards FMVSS passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front If a Deployment Occurs floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals The airbag system is designed to deploy when the ORC They are not permanent and normally heal quickly detects a moderate to severe collision to help restrain the However if you haven t healed significantly within a driver and front passenger and th
161. asive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with an electric defroster Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft tissue ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 457 Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the car to wash them Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Dry with a soft tissue Cleaning The Cupholders Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent FUSES TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE The Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM is located in the engine compartment near the air cleaner assembly This center contains fuses and relays
162. assenger compartment Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken from its mount ing Do not store it in the vehicle Positioning Retractable Cargo Area Cover REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Wiper Washer If Equipped KA The Rear Window Wiper Washer Control is lo cated on the right side of the steering column 81c0cc61 Rear Window Wiper Washer Control UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193 The rotary ring switch on the lever controls rear wiper and washer operation Rotate the switch upward to the first detent to activate the rear wiper Rotate the switch upward to the second detent to activate the rear washer The washer will continue to operate until you release the switch Once released the wiper will cycle three times return to the park position and then resume normal operation NOTE The rear wiper will automatically return to the park position if you turn OFF the ignition switch while it is operating The rear wiper will resume operation when you turn the ignition switch to the ON position again 194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE es CAUTION Adding Washer Fluid 7 NOTE Refer to the Engine Compartment diagram in Turn the rear wiper OFF when driving through an Section 7 for the location of the washer fluid reservoir automatic car wash Damage to the rear wiper may result if the rear wiper switch is left in the ON position The windshield washer and rear window
163. at can be plugged in draw power and electronic devices from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent engine starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these intermittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from Power Inverter the plug ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 The control switch for the outlet is located in the switch bank above the climate control 81e6f7c1 Power Inverter Switch Press and release the switch once to turn ON the power outlet A status indicator in the switch will illuminate in approximately one second to indicate that power is available at the outlet Press and release the switch again to turn OFF the power outlet The status indicator will also turn off NOTE Due to built in overload protection the power outlet will shut down if the 115 Volt AC 150 Watt maximum power rating is
164. at you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247 Operation Instructions DISC MODE for CD and MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD VIDEO The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region These region codes must match in order for the disc to play If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region
165. atback rearward until it locks in place and then continue sliding the seat rearward on its tracks until it locks in place 2 Push the seat cushion downward to lock it in place 3 Adjust the seat track position as desired Then using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched 50 50 Split Third Row Passenger Seats with Fold Flat Feature Seven Passenger Models To provide additional storage area each third row pas senger seat can be folded flat This allows for extended cargo space and still maintains some rear seating room if needed NOTE Prior to folding the third row passenger seat make sure the second row passenger seat is not in a reclined position This will allow the seat to fold easily 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To Fold the Seat Pull the latch release loop located at the top of the seatback upward push the seat forward slightly and release the release loop Then continue to push the seat forward The head restraints will fold automatically as the seat moves forward p Seatback Release To Unfold the Seat Grasp the assist strap loop on the seatback and pull it toward you to raise the seatback Continue to raise the seatback until it locks in place Then raise the head restraint to lock it in place Assist Strap en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 The seatback can also be locked in a reclined posit
166. ave an accident CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 Ibs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis tance When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher Towing Requirements Trailer Lights and Wiring brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety STARTING AND OPERATING 389 The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector RIGHT STOP TURN NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles LEFT FEMALE wiring harness STOP TURN O PINS The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle PARK but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustrations GND MALE PIN mm 813262be 4 Pin Connector 390 STARTING AND OPERATING RUNNING BATTERY LAMPS BACKUP LAMPS LH STOP RH TURN STOP o TURN ELECTRIC GROUND P BRAKES 812634c6 7 Pin Connector Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic
167. axle GCWR Gross Com bined Wt Rating Frontal Area Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt Max Tongue Wt 2 4L Automatic 6 000 Ibs 2 722 kg 22 sq ft 2 0 sq m 1 000 Ibs 454 kg which includes up to 5 persons amp Luggage 100 Ibs 45 kg 2 7L 3 5L with out Trailer Tow Prep Package AHT 7 300 Ibs 3 311 kg 32 sq ft 3 0 sq m 2 000 Ibs 907 kg which includes 1 to 2 persons amp Luggage 200 Ibs 91 kg 7 300 Ibs 3 311 kg 32 sq ft 3 0 sq m 1 500 Ibs 680 kg which includes 3 to 4 persons amp Luggage 150 Ibs 68 kg 7 300 Ibs 3 311 kg 32 sq ft 3 0 sq m 1 000 Ibs 454 kg which includes 5 to 7 persons amp Luggage 100 Ibs 45 kg Except for AWD models 2 7L with Trailer Tow Prep Package AHT 8 300 Ibs 3 765 kg 40 sq ft 3 7 sq m 3 000 Ibs 1 361 kg which in cludes up to 5 persons amp Lug Babe 300 Ibs 136 kg 8 300 Ibs 3 765 kg 40 sq ft 3 7 sq m 1 000 Ibs 454 kg which includes 6 to 7 persons amp Luggage 100 Ibs 91 kg ee STARTING AND OPERATING 383 Engine GCWR Gross Com Transaxle bined Wt Rating Max Tongue Wt 350 Ibs 159 kg Frontal Area Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt 3 500 lbs 1 588 kg which in cludes 1 to 2 persons amp Luggage 3 000 Ibs 1 361 kg which in 8 300 Ibs 3 765 kg 40 sq ft 3 7 sq m 8 300 Ibs 3 765 kg 40 sq ft 3 7 sq m 300 Ibs 136
168. be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN IF EQUIPPED This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The tilt telescoping control handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Tilt Telescoping Steering Wheel Lock To unlock the steering column push the control handle downward To tilt the steering column move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired To lock the steering column in position pull the control handle upward until fully engaged WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving The tilt telescoping adjustment must be locked while driving Adjusting the steering wheel while driving or driving without the tile telescoping adjustment locked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged this device takes over the accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h Electronic Speed Control Operation The speed control lever is located on the right side of the steering w
169. been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle the seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered the BeltAlert will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled The BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert Programming The BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by performing the following steps NOTE The manufacturer of this vehicle does not rec ommend deactivating the BeltAlert 1 With all doors closed and the ignition switch in any position except ON or START buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position engine does not need to be running Wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off and then proceed to the next step NOTE You must perform the following steps within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON position 3 Unbuckle the driver s seat belt allow the seat belt to retract and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times ending with the seat belt buckled NOTE Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn on while the seat
170. belt retracts and turn off while re buckling the seat belt It may be necessary to completely retract the seat belt each time ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 4 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position A single chime will sound to signify that you have success fully completed the programming The BeltAlert can be reactivated by repeating this pro cedure NOTE When the BeltAlert is deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate as long as the driver s seat belt is unbuckled retracted Automatic Locking Mode In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked However the belt will still retract to remove slack in the shoulder belt Use The Automatic Locking mode any time a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this feature Children 12 years old and younger should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible How to Engage the Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until I the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will here a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking mode and activate the
171. brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure You could have an accident If you see any signs of cracking scuffing or worn spots have the brake hoses replaced immediately Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if the Brake System Warning Light indicates system failure Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per forming underhood services 448 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap If necessary add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reser voir Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type WARNING e Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire e Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial boiling point or is unidentified as to specification may result in sudden brake failure during hard prolonged braking You could have an accident Use only brake fluid that has been
172. by turning the ignition switch from the LOCK position to the ON position The light should turn on for approxi mately two seconds and then turn off The light will remain on if the parking brake is applied or if a brake fault is detected If the parking brake is not applied and the light remains on or if the light does not turn on have the light inspected by an authorized dealer NOTE The light will turn on when the ignition switch is in the ON position and the parking brake is applied This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application See page 326 for more information 27 Airbag Warning Light This light will turn on for four to six seconds as 9 a bulb check when the ignition switch is first S turned ON If the light is either not on during starting or stays on or turns on while driving then have the system inspected at your authorized dealer as soon as possible See page 63 for more information 28 Compass Temperature Display Button Mid Line Clusters Only Operates the Compass Temperature display in the Vacuum Fluorescent Display 29 Vacuum Fluorescent Display Mid Line And Premium Clusters Only On vehicles equipped with a Premium Cluster this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC messages when the appropriate conditions exist See page 221 for more information On vehicles equipped with a Mid Line Cluster this display shows the
173. ce Contract If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer s Service 490 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ME Contract and you require service after the manufactur er s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION U S Vehicles Only See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and provisions of Chrysler LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 491 MOPAR PARTS Mopar fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They will help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPO
174. ce purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas T p Jack Storage Location A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided Spare Tire Location The spare tire is stowed underneath the rear of the vehicle and is held in place by means of a cable winch mechanism Preparations For J acking 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible Avoid icy or slippery areas 2 Set the parking brake and place the shift lever in PARK 3 Turn OFF the ignition A 4 Turn ON the hazard warning flashers 5 Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 397 6 Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position For ex ample if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel N BLOCKA Spare Tire Removal NOTE On Seven Passenger Models fold the third row passenger seats flat This will provide more space when accessing the jacking tools and when operating the winch mechanism 1 Remove the jack handle components 1 2 and 3 from storage and assemble them 398 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE Lowering Raising Spare Tire NOTE Assemble components 2 and 3 by seating the small ball at the e
175. cle damage drive slowly when back ing up a vehicle so that you can stop in time when an obstacle comes into view It is recommended that the driver look frequently over their shoulder when backing up a vehicle NOTE If snow ice mud or anything else builds up on the camera lens clean the lens rinse with water and dry with a soft cloth Do not cover the lens HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION UConnect IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code RER REN and REU radios contain an integrated Hands Free Communication UConnect system Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for UConnect system operating instructions for these radios UConnect is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system UConnect allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your cellular phone s audio is trans mitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the UConnect system 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MM NOTE The UConnect system requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile Ver sion 0 96 or higher See the UConnect website for supported phones NOTE For UConnect customer support visit the following websites e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e wWw jeep com uconnect e or call 1 877 855 8400 UCo
176. contains the following information e Name of manufacturer e Month and year of manufacture e Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR rear e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Type of Vehicle e Month Day and Hour of Manufacture MDH The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle m This includes driver passengers and cargo The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR 376 STARTING AND OPERATING EE WARNING Because the front wheels steer the vehicle it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Overloading The load carrying components axle springs tires wheels etc of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and rear GAWR The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it is
177. control to the desired temperature setting Two and Three Zone Manual Air Conditioning and Heating Systems If Equipped 81dc1922 Two Zone Manual Climate Control 1 Left Front Temperature Control Provides left front seat occupant with independent tem perature control Turn left for cooler or right for warmer temperature settings 290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 2 Panel Mode Button Press and release to select The indicator illuminates when selected 3 Bi Level Mode Button Press and release to select The indicator illuminates when selected 4 Front Blower Control The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the O Off position There are four blower speeds 5 Floor Mode Button Press and release to select The indicator illuminates when selected 6 Mix Mode Button Press and release to select The indicator illuminates when selected 7 Right Front Temperature Control Provides right front seat occupant with independent temperature control Turn left for cooler or right for warmer temperature settings 8 Electric Rear Window Defroster Button Refer to Rear Window Features in Section 3 for more information 9 Recirculation Mode Button Press and release to change the current setting The indicator illuminates when ON 10 Defrost Mode Button Press and release to select The indicator illuminates when selected en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291 11 A
178. creased leverage Alternate tion 5 for additional warnings cautions and informa wheel nuts until each nut has been tightened twice tion about the spare tire its use and operation Correct wheel nut tightness is 95 ft Ibs 130 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station WARNING 10 Lower the jack to its fully closed position WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve 7 Install the wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the wheel nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury or death hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided Have the deflated flat tire 8 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counter repaired or replaced immediately clockwise with the jack handle 406 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME 11 Place the deflated flat tire in the cargo area Do not stow the deflated tire in the spare tire stowage location Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible 12 To stow the winch cable and retainer fit the as sembled jack handle over the winch drive nut Rotate the jack handle assembly clockw
179. ctable cargo area cover mounts in the cargo area behind the top of the rear seats The cover when extended covers the cargo area to keep items out of sight Notches in the trim panels near the liftgate opening secure the extended cover in place The cover rolls away neatly inside its housing when not in use You can also remove the cover from the vehicle to make more room in the cargo area To install the cover position it in the vehicle so that the flat side of the housing faces upward Then insert either the left or the right spring loaded post located on the ends of the cover housing into the left attachment point or the right attachment point shown ccbd Installing Retractable Cargo Area Cover Then insert the spring loaded post on the opposite end of the cover housing into the attachment point on the opposite side of the vehicle 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN Next grab the cover handle and pull the cover toward WARNING you As the cover nears the liftgate opening guide the rear attachment posts on both ends of the cover into the A cargo cover that is unsecured in the vehicle could notches in the trim panels Then lower the cover to cause injury in an accident It could become airborne position the posts into the bottom of the notches and during a sudden stop and strike someone inside the release the handle S vehicle Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the p
180. ction 3 Tighten the knobs on each cross rail to lock it in position As you tighten the knob make sure the clamp tooth engages completely into the side rail slot 4 Attempt to move the cross rail to ensure that it is locked in position NOTE To help control wind noise when installing the cross rails make sure the arrows marked on the underside of the cross rails face the front of the vehicle To help reduce the amount of wind noise when the cross rails are not in use fasten the front cross rail in the fourth position from the front and the rear cross rail in the eighth position The tie down holes on the cross rail ends should always be used to tie down the load Check the straps frequently to be sure that the load remains securely attached 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ae CAUTION WARNING e Cross rails should remain equally spaced or parallel Cargo must be securely tied before driving your at any luggage rack position for proper function vehicle Improperly secured loads can fly off the Noncompliance could result in damage to the roof m rack cargo and vehicle vehicle particularly at high speeds resulting in per To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle do not sonal Juy UE property damage Follow the Roof exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 Rack Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof lbs 68 kg Always distribute loads as evenly as rack possible and secure the l
181. cumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 441 Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill The system should be drained flushed and refilled at the intervals shown in the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of old antifreeze solution Selection of Coolant Use only the manufacturer s recommended coolant Re fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct coolant type CAUTION e Mixing of coolants other than specified HOAT engine coolants may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection If a non HOAT coolant is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with the speci fied coolant as soon as possible Do not use plain water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator Thi
182. d e The infrared sensor independently measures the sur face temperature of the driver and passengers e Other sensors take into account vehicle speed A C pressure outside temperature and engine cooling temperature Using all of these inputs the system automatically ad justs airflow temperature airflow distribution airflow volume and the amount of outside air recirculation This maintains a comfortable temperature even under chang ing conditions To select automatic operation perform the following steps 1 Press and release the AUTO button and the ATC displays the word AUTO along with current settings for temperature mode and blower speed It also displays the snowflake icon if the A C is running 2 Turn the Left Front Temperature Control the Right Front and if so equipped the Rear Temperature Control to dial in the temperature that you want the system to en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299 maintain for each zone On Three Zone ATC systems if so desired push and release the SYNC button Then turn the Left Front Temperature Control to dial in the tem perature that you want the system to maintain for all three zones Once the comfort level is selected the system will main tain that level automatically using the heating system Should the desired comfort level require A C the system will automatically make the adjustment You will expe rience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system
183. d To Enter Remote Start Mode on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec onds The parking lights will flash and the horn engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle e The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee e For security power window and power sunroof op eration if so equipped are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode e The engine can be started two consecutive times two 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle To Exit Remote Start Mode without Driving the Vehicle Allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle Before the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON position NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON position in order to drive the vehicle To Turn Off the Engine While in Remote Start Mode Press and release the REMOTE START button one time NOTE To avoid inadvertent shut downs the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Rem
184. d release the window lockout button again setting it in the up position 81d10c04 Window Lockout Switch Reset It may be necessary at some point in time to reactivate the Auto up Auto down feature To do so perform the following steps 1 Pull the window switch up to close window com pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed 2 Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sun roof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window LIFTGATE The liftgate can be unlocked or locked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or by activating the power door lock switch located on either front door trim panel NOTE The liftgate cannot be unlocked or locked with the manua
185. d never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of ee STARTING AND OPERATING 343 available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 Ibs 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load cargo luggage and towing capaci ties of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate
186. d periodically and replaced if re quired Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure Low generator belt tension can cause battery failure Inspect belts for evidence of cuts cracks glazing or frayed cords and replace if there is indication of damage that could result in belt failure Also check belt routing to make sure there is no interference between the belts and other engine components Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for specified service intervals See your authorized dealer for service ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429 Spark Plugs Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine perfor mance and emissions control New plugs should be installed at the specified mileage The entire set should be replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark plug Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the proper type of spark plug for use in your vehicle Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for engine air cleaner filter service intervals NOTE Be sure to follow the dusty or off road condi tions maintenance interval if applicable WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engi
187. d weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact e Insects tree sap and tar e Salt in the air near seacoast localities e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 453 e Use Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish CAUTION Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces Special Care e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarri
188. damage can result If rear towing is the only alternative a front end dolly must be used Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle 414 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES BEEN All Wheel Drive AWD CAUTION The manufacturer does not recommend towing an All Wheel Drive AWD on a tow dolly Vehicle damage may occur MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS E 2 4L Engine Compartment 418 E 2 7L Engine Compartment ls 419 E 3 5L Engine Compartment L 420 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBDII 421 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 421 H Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Programs ile asi na He ea hx PX AR 422 Bl Replacement Parts 000 0008 423 Bl Authorized Dealer Service 424 Bl Maintenance Procedures 00 424 Engme Oil c ceed nen eme nia Res 424 Engine Oil Filter 0 eese 428 Drive Belts Check Condition And Tension 428 Spark Plugs i eere ue pet Pagani REA 429 Wr Engine Air Cleaner Filter llus 429 Catalytic Converter 0 0000 429 Maintenance Free Battery 431 Air Conditioner Maintenance 433 416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN A C Air Filter If Equipped 434 Power
189. decreases To Accelerate For Passing Depress the accelerator pedal as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Speed Control on Hills NOTE The speed control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without speed control 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE gee WARNING Speed Control can be dangerous where the system can t maintain a constant speed Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Don t use Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery OVERHEAD CONSOLE The overhead console contains courtesy reading lights storage for sunglasses an interior observation mirror and an optional power sunroof switch Overhead Console Courtesy Reading Lights Refer to Courtesy Reading Lights under Lights in Section 3 en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 Sunglasses Storage To access the storage compartment press on the raised bars on the compartment door in the center of the console and release and the door will swing downward Interior Observation Mirror The convex interior observation mirror provides the driver and front seat passenger a wide field of view to conveniently vie
190. dio Medium Wave if equipped To switch to the AM band say AM or RADIO AM In this mode you may say the following commands e FREQUENCY to change the frequency e NEXT STATION to select the next station e PREVIOUS STATION to select the previous station e RADIO MENU to switch to the radio menu e MAIN MENU to switch to the main menu Radio FM To switch to the FM band say FM or RADIO FM In this mode you may say the following commands e FREQUENCY to change the frequency e NEXT STATION to select the next station e PREVIOUS STATION to select the previous station e RADIO MENU to switch to the radio menu e MAIN MENU to switch to the main menu Satellite Radio To switch to satellite radio mode say SAT or SATELLITE RADIO In this mode you may say the following com mands e CHANNEL NUMBER to change the channel by its spoken number en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 e NEXT CHANNEL to select the next channel PREVIOUS CHANNEL to select the previous chan nel e LIST CHANNEL to hear a list of available channels e SELECT NAME to say the name of a channel e RADIO MENU to switch to the radio menu e MAIN MENU to switch to the main menu Disc To switch to the disc mode say DISC In this mode you may say the following commands e TRACK to change the track e NEXT TRACK to play the next track e PREVIOUS TRACK to play the previous track e MAIN MENU to switch to the m
191. ditions using the 5 range will improve perfor mance and extend transaxle life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up D Overdrive 4 Speed Transaxle This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts downshifts and best fuel economy However select the 3 range when frequent transaxle shifting occurs while using the D Overdrive range such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions ie in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers Under these conditions using the 3 range will improve performance and extend transaxle life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up 316 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN CAUTION If the transaxle operating temperature exceeds ac ceptable limits the vehicle computer will override 3 Drive 4 Speed Transaxle This range eliminates shifts into D Overdrive The transaxle will operate normally in 1st 2nd and 3rd while in this range The 3 Drive range should also be used when descending steep grades to prevent brake system distress NOTE Using the 3 Drive range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transaxle life by reducing exces sive shifting and heat build up L Low 4 Speed Transaxle This range should be used for engine braking when descending very steep grades In this rang
192. dy is a properly maintained engine exhaust system 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the seat belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the seat belt Airbag Warning Light The light should turn on and remain on for four to six seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting or if the light stays on flickers or turns on while driving have the system checked by an authorized d
193. e 3 5L Engine RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING ReMy2 METHOD 87 800dfab6 RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING ReMy2 METHOD 89 800dfab7 lines and in performance The 3 5L Engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfac tory fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded gasoline hav ing an octane range of 87 to 89 The manu facturer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance The use of pre mium gasoline is not recommended Un der normal conditions the use of premium gasoline will not provide a benefit over high quality regular and mid grade gaso some circumstances may result in poorer Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such ee STARTING AND OPERATING 369 as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experi ence these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World Wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWEC speci fications if they are available Reformulated Gasolin
194. e Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as reformulated gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the Winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle 370 STARTING AND OPERATING EE CAUTION For vehicles equipped with a 2 4L or 3 5L engine DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or E85 Etha nol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system components NOTE The 2 7L engine is now rated for E85 Ethanol use EXCEPT CALIFORNIA EMISSION STATES Only vehicles with the E 85 fuel filler door label can operate on E 85 For more information refer to Flexible Fuel in this section Problems that result from using methanol gasoline or E85 ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of metha nol
195. e s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure eOver inflated or under inflated tires can affect ve hicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control 346 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN WARNING e Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems You could lose control of your vehicle e Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure 2 Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consump tion 3 Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed either on the face of the driver s door or on the driver s side B pillar Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition These pressure con ditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information sectio
196. e the horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors Check the vehicle for tampering ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM The interior lights will turn on when you press the unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE trans mitter or open a door or the liftgate This feature also turns on the approach lighting if so equipped Refer to Illumin Approach under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Sec tion 4 The interior lights will fade to off after about 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned ON NOTE e The illuminated entry system will not operate the interior lights if the Dimmer Control is in the extreme downward Defeat position REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to about 35 ft 11 m using a hand held radio transmitter The transmitter need not be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NOTE Inserting the Fob with Integrated Key into the ignition switch disables all buttons on that transmitter however the buttons on the remaining transmitters will continue to work Driving at speeds 5 mph 8 km h and above disables all transmitter buttons for all fobs en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 81c6853a Remote Keyless Entry RKE Transmitter To Unlock the Doors and
197. e upshifts will occur only to prevent engine overspeed while downshifts occur earlier than other gear range selections D Overdrive and 5 range for 6 speed AutoStick transaxle and 3 range for 4 speed auto transaxle by changing shift points This is done to prevent transaxle damage due to overheating Reset Mode Electronic Transaxle The transaxle is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could cause damage the transaxle automatically shifts into 2nd gear 8rd gear for 6 speed The transaxle remains in 2nd gear 8rd gear for 6 speed despite the forward gear selected EE STARTING AND OPERATING 317 PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to oper ate This Reset feature allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transaxle In the event of a momentary problem the transaxle can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps Stop the vehicle Shift into PARK Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position Restart the engine oT A C NY e Shift into the desired gear range and resume driving NOTE Even if the transaxle can be reset it is recom mended that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transaxle cannot be reset authorized dealer service is req
198. e 188 Cargo Management System 188 Rollaway Tonneau Cover 000 191 Tri Fold Load Floor 004 188 en INDEX 499 Cargo Tie Downs Sanet ta aane eee 189 Cargo Vehicle Loading 188 375 Catalytic Converter 0 terias 429 CD Compact Disc Player 234 266 CD Compact Disc Player Maintenance 284 Cellular Phone 0000 93 266 267 Certification Label ct oe bee eps 375 Chains Tite 245 2405 2 3 x9 Pee b E ET ebd qs 355 Changing A blat Tite esses Reb 396 Charging System Light 212 Chart Dre Sizing xe pipi aaa der ETE RR deta a 338 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 422 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 78 Checks Safety 6 eee 78 Child Booster Seat 1 6 6 02 e eee eee 67 Child Restraint 4 sa4 0425 0s95 00 65 67 69 73 75 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 71 73 Child Safety Locks 1 2 0 0 0 000 000 0000 32 Clean Air Gasoline 0 ees 369 Cleaning Wheels 22 2226 Li RR ene badeu ex RE 454 Windshield Wiper Blades 437 Climate Control 2i a ee eV Ded 285 Clock aaa caw ca doe AC Ra 236 240 255 267 Cott Hold f zie eda yen Ede usd 183 Cold Weather Operation 04 309 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 284 Compact spate Dre sss cab sex e eem d 349 COMPASS a se caw aia Serene d eo ma ERROR d 227 Compas
199. e MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431 In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may indicate severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs safely bring the vehicle to a complete stop shut the engine OFF and allow the vehicle to cool Thereafter obtain service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifications im mediately To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage e Do not shut OFF the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transaxle is in gear and the vehicle is in motion e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle Do not idle the engine with any ignition coil connec tors disconnected for prolonged periods Maintenance F ree Battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required NOTE The battery is stored in a compartment that is located behind the left front fender and is accessible through the wheel well The wheel and tire assemble do not need to be removed to access the compartment Remote battery terminals are located in the engine com partment for jump starting To access the battery turn the steering wheel fully to the right and remove the access panel from the inner fender shield 432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING CAUTION e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can e It is essential when replacing the cables on the burn or even blind you Don t allow battery fluid to
200. e Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hands Free Phone UConnect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free mm Communication UConnect9 in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UConnect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button and the time of day will display In AM or FM mode pressing the TIME button will switch between the time and frequency displays Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune Scroll control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side Tune Scroll control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune Scroll control knob Press the Tune Scroll control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the Tune Scroll control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letter
201. e Plate Light 1 Push the small locking tab sticking out of the end of the lens toward the side of the vehicle and hold it in that position 81d940c2 License Light en MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 471 2 Insert a small flat blade tool between the end of the lens with the locking tab and the surrounding housing and then pivot the tool to separate the lens from the housing 3 Hold the lens with one hand and rotate the bulb s electrical connector turn counterclockwise with the other hand and then separate the bulb and connector assembly from the lens 4 Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install the replacement bulb 5 Install the bulb and connector assembly into the lens and rotate the connector turn clockwise to lock it in place 6 Insert the end of the lens without the locking tab into the housing on the lifteate and then push the opposite end of the lens into the housing making sure it locks in the housing 472 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES Component U S Metric Fuel approximate Front Wheel Drive FWD Models with 2 4 Liter PZEV Engine 18 5 gal 701 FWD Models without 2 4 Liter PZEV Engine 20 5 gal 77 61 All Wheel Drive Models 21 1 gal 79 81 Engine Oil with Filter 24 Liter Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 4 5 qts 4261 24 Liter Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 5 5 qts 521 3 5 Liter Engine SAE 10W 30 API Ce
202. e Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger airbag unless the airbag is turned off An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position Older Children and Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren in this section The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 Ibs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Integrated Child Booster Seat If Equipped The Integrated Child Booster Seat is located in each outboard second row passenger seat The Booster Seat is designed for children weighing between 48 and 85 Ibs 22 and 39 kg and between 47 in 119 cm and 57 in
203. e TPMS Telltale light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically In addition the TPMS Telltale light will turn off and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration 364 STARTING AND OPERATING EBEN The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses United States ocreata aa ia eaa KR5S120123 Canada 5 xxx a5 sk i bears e ES 2671 8120123 FLEXIBLE FUEL 2 7L ENGINES ONLY EXCEPT CALIFORNIA EMISSION STATES E 85 GENERAL INFORMATION The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve hicles only This section onl
204. e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when us ing replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni toring Sensor and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale light 358 STARTIN
205. e Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is active es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 WARNING Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a danger ous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause seri ous injury or death Programming HomeLink Before You Begin If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons erase all channels before you begin training To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage when programming 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Hold the battery side of the hand held transmitter away from the HomeLink button you wish to program Place the hand held transmitter 1 3 in 3 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the indicator light in view 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button and the hand held transmitter button until the HomeLink indicator changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light then release both the HomeLink and hand held transmitter buttons Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates When it changes it is programmed I
206. e aa he 489 DUCSNAdd ona te ees ws aa ing 486 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Bi Publication Order Forms 22s 492 Traction Grades amp 04 9 24 quw Ce RC Oed 493 ll Department Of Transportation Uniform Temperature Grades 0000 494 Tire Quality Grades isis kn 493 Treadwear eee 493 EN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 487 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its autho
207. e been available for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retrofit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child re straint in any vehicle All three second row passenger seating positions have lower anchors that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats You should NEVER in stall LATCH compatible child seats so that two seats share a common lower anchorage If installing child seats in adjacent seating positions or if your child restraints are not LATCH compatible install the restraints using the vehicle s seat belts 81d00d01 Latch Anchorages 1 Outer 60 Seating Position Use Lower Anchor Loops A and B If placing a second child seat in the vehicle use the Outer 40 Seating Position and Lower Anchor Loops D and E DO NOT USE Middle 60 6 Seating Position and Lower Anchor age Loops B and C 2 Middle 60 Seating Position Use Lower Anchor Loops B and C If placing a second child seat in the vehicle use the Outer 40 Seating Position and Lower Anchor Loops D and E DO NOT USE Outer 60 Seating Position and Lower Anchor Loops A and B 3 Outer 40 Seating Position Use Lower Anchor Loops D and E If placing a second child seat in the vehicle use Outer 60 Seating Position and Lower Anchor Loops A and B or Middle 60 Seating Position and Lower Anchor Loops B and C ee THI
208. e control and have an accident Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings Alignment And Balance Poor suspension alignment may result in e Fast tire wear e Uneven tire wear such as feathering and one sided wear e Vehicle pull to right or left Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right Alignment will not correct this condition See your authorized dealer for proper diagnosis Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out of balance Proper balancing will reduce vibration and avoid tire cupping and spotty wear ee STARTING AND OPERATING 355 TIRE CHAINS Due to limited clearance tire chains are not recommended CAUTION Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are used SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter Standard tires are of the all season type and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M S designation on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four Failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generall
209. e engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into Then turn the ignition switch to the START position and the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire iy disengage automatically in 10 seconds Once this causing scHoe personal muy occurs release the accelerator pedal turn the ignition Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic repeat the normal starting procedure transaxle cannot be started this way Unburned CAUTION fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the To prevent damage to the starter wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a dis charged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dan gerous if done improperly Refer to Section 6 for proper jump starting procedures and follow them carefully en STARTING AND OPERATING 311 After Starting AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE The idle speed is contro
210. e exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Exhaust Gas under Safety Tips in Section 2 440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cooling System WARNING e When working near the radiator cooling fan dis connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position The fan is tempera ture controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood don t open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh coolant Check the front of the A C condenser for any ac
211. e last press of the INFO button will take you back to the Play mode screen on the radio REPEAT Button Press the REPEAT button to repeat the current playing track SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button will play the first five seconds of each track in the current list and then forward to the next song To stop the SCAN mode and start playing the desired track press the SCAN button again During the SCAN mode you can also press the SEEK button to the left or right to go to the previous or next tracks RND Random Button RES REL Radios Only Pressing the RND button will switch between the shuffle on and shuffle off modes of the iPod If the RND icon is showing on the radio display then the Shuffle mode is on List or Browse Mode During Play mode pressing any of the following buttons will take you to List mode List mode enables you to scroll through the list of menus and tracks on the iPod device en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281 TunelScroll Knob In the List mode the Tune Scroll knob functions in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod Turning the Tune Scroll knob clockwise forward and counterclockwise backward scrolls through lists dis playing the track detail on the radio display Once you have the track to be played highlighted on the radio display press the Tune Scroll knob to select and start playing the track By turning the Tune Scroll knob fast you can jump through the list faster
212. e running all windows closed and the blower fan switched OFF This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default settings enter the Voice Training session via the above procedure and follow the prompts Voice Recognition VR e For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror e Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you e Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice recognition period e Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 e fully closed windows e You can say O letter O for 0 zero 800 must be E ken eight zero zero e dry weather condition DOMUS e Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported e Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be e When navigating th
213. e stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes 260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio NOTE This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable com pact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the disc number the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD play
214. e to follow this warning may result in seri ous injury or death NOTE e Tighten the gas cap until you hear a clicking sound This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened properly The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not secured properly Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap in loose improperly installed or damaged the word gASCAP will display in the odometer If this occurs tighten the fuel filler cap until a clicking sound is heard and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the MIL Refer to Onboard Diagnostic System OBD II in Section 7 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 375 VEHICLE LOADING The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the Vehicle Certification Label This information should be used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR Vehicle Certification Label Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the rear of the driver s door The label
215. e vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Flash Light With Lock under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed transmitter for at least four seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the
216. e windshield washer and the rear window washer share the same fluid reservoir The fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water When refilling the washer fluid reservoir apply some washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades clean This will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal 4 1 of washer fluid when the message LoWASH appears in the instrument cluster ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 439 WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent technician inspect the com plet
217. eS 9e 8 oe um AU o cR Uie EEE SUR UR CR UR EADE ANAE 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ecelesie hmm 8 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE eese mnn 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 2 cece cece ccc ecc hh n nn 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 2 ccc ccc c cece r cece ewer hh m mnn e WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2 ccc cece ccc cece reece eee r nce e rece eeeeeeceens 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 44593945999 935949 S44 9e vy e rev PY Y des 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES cece ccc cece reer ee nn 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 2 eee ccc ccc cece cece hh hh hh hn 10 INDEX 4 9 hum ER E 3E SHE RR QU e o9 E Q4 8 101 BNE 3 9 AUR RU E co d Roe ique teias INTRODUCTION CONTENTS E Introduction see ee 4 Vehicle Identification Number 6 Wi How To Use This Manual 4 Bl Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Bl Warnings And Cautions 004 6 4 INTRODUCTION EN INTRODUCTION This manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents You are urged to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE
218. ealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper able ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check Turn Signal and High Beam Indicator Lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks B Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS EN la Virrors iios RR mme 88 Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped 91 Inside Day Night Mirror 88 MH Parkview Rear Backup Camera
219. easure To make your selection press and release the RESET button until U S or METRIC appears To Reset The Display Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being displayed Press and release the RESET button once to clear the resettable function being displayed To reset all resettable functions press and release the RESET button a second time within three seconds of resetting the currently displayed function gt Reset ALL will display during this three second window Compass Display Press and release this button to display A one of eight compass readings and the outside temperature The compass read COMPASS ings indicate the direction the vehicle is TEMPERA facing TURE Button 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEM Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to calibrate the compass manually When the ve hicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may calibrate the compass by slowly completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic or is inaccurate you can calibrate the compass manually by performing the fol lowing steps 1 Turn the ignition switch ON 2 Press and release the M
220. ece eae 217 Bulb Replacement pesate teans erranka s 466 Cares os eov tice ao ane ace petal og ane E E Ric 151 Courtesy Reading llle 151 Cruise uou ede eed RP PR PP ed 212 Daytime Running 0 000s 148 Dimmer Switch Headlight 146 150 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 223 fas bee Gace ape Pas 216 332 334 Electronic Throttle Control Warning 211 Extenot sesers cesas Edere eS Race E FOR gad iain ees e nss daas d Hazard Warning Flasher Headlight Switch lille Headlights 22cm RR eed Headlights On Reminder Headlights On With Wipers High Beam ew as cea gine wala gy bo High Beam Indicator 200 High Beam Low Beam Select 508 INDEX MMM Illuminated Entry iess a Darsana a DA e e 20 Instrument Cluster llle 146 205 Intensity Control llle 152 lrterlof 2213 Be eke 3 ee be PPS 151 152 IBI m 470 Lights On Reminder s seses cesset ene rawis 148 Low Fuel rue rere n m ders ang 205 207 Low tre sLzbeesucheePes b eee PE awd 213 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 215 Map Reading 49s esce eie I RR een 151 Oil PresS te s rou des int oos dore RR 211 Parade Mode Daytime Brightness 153 Parks osecetoepuued btideed lp uo 146 466 PASSING 5 sha ary Ww Bak aun e DU he e RD TSS 150 Rear Servicing eee ees 466 468 Rear al cw e eer Rm ek es de 468 Seat Belt Reminder
221. ed op eration VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Voice Recognition System VR Operation This Voice Recognition System allows you to we control your AM FM radio satellite radio disc player and a memo recorder NOTE In a stressful situation take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands may be negatively af fected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions and all attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death When you press the VR hard key you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command NOTE If you do not say a command within a few seconds the system will present you with a list of options If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists options press the VR hard key listen for the beep and say your command es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 Pressing the VR hard key while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and you can add or change commands This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE Atany time you can say the words CANCEL HELP or MAIN MENU These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other c
222. ee ee eee 487 Service Contract 0 s 0 ese n os 489 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction Indicator lessen 215 Service Manuals llle 492 Setting the Clock 0 236 240 255 267 Settings Personal soseo cro liess 230 Shifting Automatic Transaxle lessen 311 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage 46 Shoulder Belts lees 41 Side Airbag sodesee ee ceed aes aie eia 52 58 Side Curtain Window Airbag 52 Side View Mirror Adjustment 89 Side Window Demisters Defrosters 301 Signals Tam cies n 81 149 207 468 Sirius Backseat TV 2 eee eee 276 Slippery Surfaces Driving On 320 Snow Chains Tire Chains 355 SHOW TIKI anas SK boat dre alah hae dba a EAE 355 Sound Systems Radio 234 266 Spare TE viges rere oic eats eee ae 349 350 397 Spark Plugs 4 02 tw ae Pode rovg eR eo was 429 474 Specifications Fuel Gasoline 0000 eee eee ee 474 Oil bc ene gad ete eas ewe eae Soe 426 474 Speed Control Cruise Control 159 Speedometer cius ru eg dis E E Ra 207 DLar ng uos cou rh wee ba ee Gee edd 27 307 Automatic Transmission issus 308 Cold Weather leere 309 Emergency Jump Starting en INDEX 515 Engine Fails to Start oe ceeace i sanau watia 310 Remote 223 9 ase eR EG patapi ata aai 27 Starting and Operating 0
223. ee impact bolsters the instrument panel and the steering wheel and column Furthermore the airbag system is not active if the key is in the LOCK position the ACC position or not in the ignition e The ORC commands Airbag Warning Light operation The Airbag Warning Light in the instrument panel turns on for four to six seconds as a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system the light will turn on until the malfunction is corrected A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial start up Y WARNING Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away e The Driver and Front Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the passenger s side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the air bags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front airbags Different airbag inflation rates may be possible based on collision severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper passenger s side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags
224. ee seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display INFO Button REU Radio Pressing the INFO button will display information about Artist Song Title and Composer if available Pressing the INFO button again will close the INFO screen RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary Tune Scroll control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Except REU Radio Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the Tune Scroll control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel MUSIC TYPE Button REU Radio Pressing this button provides a MUSIC TYPES list from which you can make a selection Once a selection is ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275 made you can seek up or down or scan the channe
225. een cycles desirable Rotate the end of the Wind shield Wiper Washer control lever to the first detent and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval There are five delay settings which allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of two cycles every second to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between cycles or from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles at vehicle speeds greater than 10 mph 16 km h Mist Control 81c0cc56 Mist Feature Push downward on the Windshield Wiper Washer con trol lever to activate a single wipe cycle to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from a passing vehicle The wipers will continue to operate until you release the lever 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Headlights with Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned ON if the multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column is placed in the A AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned OFF if they were turned ON by this feature The Headlights with Wipers feature can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped Refer to Headlights With Wipers under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures under Electronic
226. ehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times n 9 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with WARNINGI lap shoulder belts It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or i outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed very sudden stops or impacts This feature allows the Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under is not equipped with seats and seat belts normal conditions However in a collision the belt will rre eve yane in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat rae PP elt properly lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the P pery Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are vehicle or being thrown out designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision best Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too Two people should never be belted int
227. elltale light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 360 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically and the TPMS Telltale light will turn off as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Premium System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Three Trigger modules mounted in three of the four wheel wells Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings V The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will 5 illuminate in the instrument cluster and
228. emporary emergency use on your vehicle This tire is identified by a limited use spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare tire and wheel assembly This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same tire replace or repair the original tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity WARNING The limited use spare tires are for emergency use only Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire DO NOT drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly Replace or repair the original tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control ee STARTING AND OPERATING 351 Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions DO NOT spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously with out stopping when you are stuck For additional information refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in Section 6 WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one DO
229. ems when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers en STARTING AND OPERATING 385 NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or authorized dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle driv etrain components the following guidelines are recom mended CAUTION e Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 mi 805 km of vehicle operation Doing so may damage your vehicle e During the first 500 mi 805 km of trailer towing limit your speed to 50 mph 80 km h Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 When tow ing a trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings 386 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN WARNING Improper towing can lead to an injury accident Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and that it will not shift during travel When traile ring cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be dif
230. en the parking unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a brake is applied and the ignition switch is on number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in NOTE This light only shows that the parking brake is the ignition A child could operate power win applied It does not show the degree of brake application dows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and an accident the parking brake released a brake system malfunc tion is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately 326 STARTING AND OPERATING EE BRAKE SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic BRAKE brake systems If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal capability the remaining system will still function However there will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness This will be evident by increased pedal travel during application and greater pedal force required to slow or stop the vehicle In addition if the malfunction is caused by a leak in the hydraulic system the Brake System Warning Light will turn on as the brake fluid level drops in the master cylinder In the event power assist is lost for any reason i e repeated brake applications with the engine OFF the brakes wil
231. en to immediately few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor deflate immediately ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 e As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s instruc tions for cleaning Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact that causes airbag deployment with the vehicle communication network intact and the power intact the Enhanced Accident Response System performs the following functions Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the airbags seat belt pretensioner and seat belt retractor assem bly replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible e It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the airbags have been deployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you e Cuts off fuel to the engine e Flashes hazard lights 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee e Turns on the interior lights which remain on
232. er Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261 EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Bjecting with ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD MP3 modes SCAN Button Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press the RW button to stop the CD at the beginning of the current CD track title Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pres
233. er strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on ee STARTING AND OPERATING 353 Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an autho rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability DO NOT use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics result ing in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle 354 STARTING AND OPERATING EE WARNING e NEVER use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could los
234. ere luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturers directions it pro vides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR requirements 380 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN WARNING EXAMPLE ONLY e An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch system may reduce handling stability braking performance and could result in an accident Weight distributing systems may not be compatible with surge brake couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable recreational vehicle dealer for addition
235. erience an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start and a deterioration in driveability sags and or hesitations until the engine is fully warmed up CRUISING RANGE Because E 85 fuel contains less energy per gallon than gasoline you will experience an increase in fuel con sumption You can expect your fuel economy and driving range to decrease by about 30 compared to gasoline operation REPLACEMENT PARTS Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV are designed to be compatible with ethanol Always be sure that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com patible parts Replacing fuel system components with non ethanol compatible components can damage your vehicle MAINTENANCE CAUTION Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85 in your vehicle It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may affect driveability 368 STARTING AND OPERATING FUEL REQUIREMENTS 2 4L and 2 7L Engines RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING ReMy2 METHOD 87 2 4L and 2 7L Engines are designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide ex cellent fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded regu soodiabe lar gasoline having an octane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recom mended Under normal conditions the use of premium gasoline will not provide a benefit over high quality unleaded regular gasolines and in some circumstances may result in poorer performanc
236. escribed in the Operation section The UConnect system can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone See the UConnect website for supported phones If your cellu lar phone supports a different profile e g Headset Profile you may not be able to use any UConnect features Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details The UConnect system is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the UConnect system can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the UConnect system such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect system and to navigate through the UConnect menu structure Voice commands are required after most UConnect system prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MM e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing e For each feature explanation in this section only the comb
237. ess ing the LOCK button on the transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm Using the Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF press and hold the PANIC button on the transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph 24 km h or greater NOTE e The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position while the Panic Alarm is activated However the exterior lights and horn will remain on e You may need to be less than 35 ft 11 m from the vehicle when using the transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 Express Down Window Feature This feature allows you to remotely lower both front door windows at the same time To
238. ets in the headliner unless the climate control for the rear passen gers is ON and in Floor mode NOTE These outlets are adjustable to direct airflow For maximum airflow to the rear aim the center instrument panel outlets so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers e Bi Level gt e Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets For vehicles equipped with a three zone system air is also directed through the outlets in the headliner unless the climate control for the rear passengers is ON and in Floor mode NOTE For all settings except full cold or full hot there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions e Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets For vehicles equipped with a three zone system air is directed through the floor outlet in the right quarter trim panel unless the climate control for the rear passengers is ON and in Panel mode e Mix Ge Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demist outlets For vehicles equipped with a three zone system air is directed through the floor outlet in the right quarter trim panel unless the climate control for the rear passengers is ON and in Panel mode NOTE This setting works best in c
239. f power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION TIRE MARKINGS SERVICE HANNUN DESCRIPTION ERE A 9 e GS are SIZE V Ur MAXIMUM DESIGNATION PRESSURE TREADWEAR U S DOT TRACTION SAFETY N A peal STANDARDS A ee TEMPERATURE CODE GRADES TIN 811b44e8 NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa t
240. fer to Key Off Power Delay under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Sunroof Fully Closed Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the sunroof is fully closed ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS There are two fused 12 Volt power outlets located in the center console below the radio The outlet on the top has power available when the ignition switch in the ON or ACC position The outlet on the bottom has power available when the ignition switch is in the LOCK ON or ACC position Front Power Outlets 1 Switched Power 2 Battery Power ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 A third fused 12 Volt power outlet is located on the back A fourth fused 12 Volt power outlet is located on the left of the center console This outlet has power available quarter trim panel in the cargo area This outlet has when the ignition switch is in the LOCK ON or ACC power available when the ignition switch is in the ON or position ACC position Rear Power Outlet 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off POWER INVERTER If EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a 115 Volt AC 150 CAUTION Watt maximum power outlet located on the back of the center console This outlet can power small appliances e Many accessories th
241. ficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident e When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not over load your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or damage to brakes axle engine transaxle steering suspension chassis structure or tires Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transaxle in PARK Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR 2 GTW 3 GAWR EN STARTING AND OPERATING 387 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage This requirement may limit the ability to always before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General Infor achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a mation in this section for information on tread wear percentage of total trailer weight indicators and for the proper inspection procedure Towing Requirements Tires When replacing tires
242. for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle NOTE For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 Ibs 392 kg 344 STARTING AND OPERATING EE Occupants Combined weight of AVAILABLE TOTAL FRONT REAR occupants and cargo MINUS Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 130 Ib Occupant 3 160 Ibs 180 Ibs EXAMPLE 1 195 Ibs EXAMPLE 2 Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 lbs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs 540 Ibs 325 Ibs EXAMPLE 3 Occupant 1 200 lbs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 865 Ibs 400 Ibs 465 Ibs Bitaddit ee STARTING AND OPERATING 345 WARNING 1 Safety WARNING eImproperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them e Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire failure TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure WARNING Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure eOver inflation reduces a tir
243. for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the UConnect system will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle Delete UConnect Paired Cellular Phones e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts e You can also press the Voice Recognition button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete Things You Should Know About Your UConnect System UConnect Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the PHONE button and say UConnect Tutorial Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the UConnect system Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two following proce dures 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE BEEN From outside the UConnect mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the Voice Recognition button for five seconds until the session begins or e Press the Voice Recognition button and say the Setup Voice Training command Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the UConnect system For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engin
244. formation Placard 341 Tire Identification Number TIN 340 Tire Markings eu eg 9 RR REOR 337 Tire Safety Information 0 0 337 Jc rc 81 345 493 Aging Life of Tires vie rese aces 352 Air Pressute s se RES Sdn pee ae de i 345 Alignment 132g binned esad RR ss 354 Chains seses piratem arde ae ERA RR ies 355 Changing 59s Fu ed be es Phe eal d 396 Compact Spare a ea gas ER RR e dons 349 General Information 000005 345 High Sp ed oc acces dee aaa dea eee ee 348 Inflation Pressures eee ee ee 346 Jacking sstscakis ind pu epe Phe agr 396 Life Of es 2 2 GR bh eee eed RA 352 Load Capacity 000000000 341 342 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 355 Quality Grading ive e EE e a 493 Radial gosta date ee altel MERE SG GE 349 Replacement leee eee ee 352 Safety voee Reb RE AERE E 337 345 SIZES ip gc k gebe RUP 28408324 RSS Ry ES 338 Snow Tires u sage sieaa sede Sox sce ah RR RUE Rod 355 Spare Tite oes ee EC eb ace ep e 397 SPINNING xara dcs eRekal seh aga dia ikk aes 351 Trailer TOWNS cLibesd ce ee exanb ek e E ess 387 Tread Wear Indicators lll 351 To Open Hood va ers thigh Sean che ed 144 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 384 TOWING e feet eet ad Ride ea RE Re 377 24 Hour Towing Assistance 5 106 Behind a Motor Home 392 Disabled Vehicle 00 0000 cease 412 Guide ssp dee
245. four to six seconds when the ignition switch is first turned ON e The light remains on or flickers after the four to six second interval The light flickers or comes on and remains on while driving Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of an accident your vehicle is designed to record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param eters see the following list in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment or near deployment and up to a quarter second of high speed deceleration data during and or after airbag deploy ment EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys or nearly deploys and are otherwise unavailable NOTE 1 A near deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica tive of a crash but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment 2 Under certain circumstances EDR data may not be recorded e g loss of battery power 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee In conjunction with other data gathered during a com plete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by the manufacturer of this vehicle and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle performance In addition to crash investigations initiated by the manufacturer of this vehicle such investigations may be requested by customers insurance carriers gov ernment offici
246. ft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abra sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements 196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED The roof rack cross rails and side rails are designed to carry cargo weight The load must not exceed 150 Ibs 68 kg and it should be distributed uniformly over the cross rails In addition the roof rack does not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the roof rack does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity To Move the Cross Rails 1 Loosen the knobs on top of each cross rail approxi mately six turns to disengage the clamp tooth from the side rail Roof Luggage Rack ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197 2 Relocate the cross rails aligning the cross rail stan chions end pieces with one of the vertical marks on the outboard surface of the side rail for proper positioning There are four frontward marks for the front cross rail and four rearward marks for the rear cross rail Make sure the cross rails remain equally spaced or parallel at any position for proper fun
247. g when the engine is running immediate service is required In this case you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 Also have the system checked by an authorized dealer if the light does not turn on during starting 17 Oil Pressure Warning Light S271 This light shows low engine oil pressure The light will turn on and remain on when the ignition switch is turned from the LOCK or ACC position to the ON position The light will turn off after the engine is started If the light does not turn on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer If the light turns on and remains on while driving safely bring the vehicle to a stop and shut off the engine DO NOT OPERATE THE VEHICLE UNTIL THE CAUSE IS CORRECTED This light does not show the quantity of oil in the engine The engine oil level must be checked using the proper procedure See page 424 for more information 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 18 Charging System Warning Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should turn on when the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or turns on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s electrical devices such as the fog lights or rear defroster If the light remains on it means that the c
248. ge may result lines shown on the bottle build up in the cooling system To prevent scald ing or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure 444 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Six Cylinder Engines the level of the coolant in the pressurized coolant bottle should be between the COLD and FULL range on the bottle when the engine is cold The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for coolant freeze point or replacing coolant Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional coolant is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points to Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot coolant to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle e Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
249. gh the inside door lock is in the unlocked position WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the child protection locks are engaged Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death NOTE e After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock sys tem always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position I e For emergency exit with the system engaged move the lock plunger up to the UNLOCK position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle To Disengage the Child Protection Door Lock System 1 Open the rear door 2 Insert the tip of the valet key or alike into the child lock control and rotate it to the UNLOCK position 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WINDOWS Power windows The window controls on the driver s door trim panel control all of the door windows Child Lock Control 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door 81d10c00 NOTE After disengaging the Child Protection Door Lock system always test the door from the inside to Power Window Switches make certain it is in the desired position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 There are single window controls on each passenger door trim panel which operate the passenger door windows The window controls will operate when the ignition switch is i
250. h to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice recognition command immediately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the Voice Recognition button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts On Off Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the UConnect sys tem will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations The UConnect system will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your cell phone the UConnect system will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using UConnect The status is given for roaming net work signal strength phone battery strength etc ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the UConnect system while dial ing via the cell phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By
251. harging system is experiencing a problem See your local authorized dealer to obtain service immediately 19 Cruise Indicator Light If Equipped CRUISE his indicator lights when the electronic speed control system is turned on See page 159 for more information 20 Trip Odometer Button Changing the Display Press and release this button once to change the display from odometer to Trip A Press and release it again to change the display from Trip A to Trip B Resetting the Trip Odometer Display the trip mileage that you want to reset Trip A or Trip B Then push and hold the button approxi mately two seconds until the display resets to 0 The odometer must be in Trip Mode to reset the trip odom eter en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 21 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light If Equipped Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and gt inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of
252. he AWD system is temporarily dis abled due to overload condition 12 Tachometer This gauge measures engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 Before the pointer reaches the red area ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage 13 Transaxle Range Indicator This display indicator shows automatic transaxle gear selection See page 311 for more information 14 Seat Belt Reminder Light This light will turn on for several seconds after the A ignition switch is turned ON as a reminder to buckle up This light will remain on as long as the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled See page 48 for more information ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 15 OdometerlTrip Odometer The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage Refer to Trip Odometer button for additional information NOTE U S Federal regulations require upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify the mileage the vehicle has been driven Therefore if the odometer reading is changed because of repair or replacement be sure to keep a record of the reading before and after the service so that the correct mileage can be determined Vehicle Warning Messages When the appropriate conditions exist messages such as hood hood ajar door door ajar gATE liftgate ajar LoCOOL low engine coolant LoWASH low washer fluid gASCAP fuel cap fa
253. he RESET button until ON or OFF appears COMPASS VARIANCE Refer to Compass Variance under Compass Display en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 CALIBRATE COMPASS Refer to Manual Compass Calibration under Com pass Display RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION Radio Broadcast Signals The radio will provide excellent reception under most operating conditions Like any system however car radios have performance limitations due to mobile op eration and natural phenomena which might lead you to believe your sound system is malfunctioning To help you understand and save you concern about these ap parent malfunctions you must understand a point or two about the transmission and reception of radio sig nals Two Types of Signals There are two basic types of radio signals AM Ampli tude Modulation in which the transmitted sound causes the amplitude or height of the radio waves to vary and FM Frequency Modulation in which the frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound Electrical Disturbance Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during transmission They mainly affect the wave amplitude and thus remain a part of the AM reception They interfere very little with the frequency variations that carry the FM signal AM Reception AM sound is based on wave amplitude so AM reception can be disrupted by such things as lightning power lines and neon signs 234 UNDERSTANDING YOU
254. hed editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature Delete Entries in the UConnect Phonebook NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the Voice Recognition button while the UConnect system is playing the desired entry and say Delete e After you enter the name the UConnect system will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work mobile pager or all Say the designation you wish to delete e Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted Delete All Entries in the U
255. heel 81812005 Speed Control Lever To Activate Push and release the ON OFF button located O on the end of the speed control lever The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system OFF push and release the ON OFF button a second time The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off Be sure to turn the system OFF when not in use NOTE e The Electronic Speed Control System will automati cally turn off when the engine is turned OFF e The Electronic Speed Control System is designed to shut down if you operate multiple speed control switch functions simultaneously i e Set and Cancel If this occurs push and release the ON OFF button to reactivate the system and then reestablish the desired Set speed 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE See WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it To Set At A Desired Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired press down ward on the lever to SET DECEL and release Release the accelerator pedal and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE e The vehicle must be traveling at least 25 mph 40 km h for the speed control to set e The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level
256. heel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in the Partial Off mode Refer to ESP Electronic Stability Program in this section for more information Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle s speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift it then applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneuvers ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers It cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions leaving the road way or striking objects or other vehicles 332 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN WARNING Many factors such as vehicle loading road condi tions and driving conditions influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles Only a safe attentive and ski
257. here one may have no wheel spin torque will be sent to the rear in a pre emptive effort to improve vehicle launch and performance characteristics 320 STARTING AND OPERATING EE WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the CAUTION All wheels must have the same size and type tires Unequal tire sizes must not be used Unequal tire size may cause failure of the power transfer unit DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES ACCELERATION Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull errati cally to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the front driving wheels front wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have an accident Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc TRACTION When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precautions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are slushy ee STARTING AND OPERATING 321 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace the tires when tread wear
258. hicle anchors Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the seatcover material Then attach the tether strap to the anchor directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint preferably between the head restraint posts underneath the head restraint Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instruc tions NOTE e Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap e When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them In addition never leave unattended children in the vehicle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child re
259. hicle with another vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans axle may result EE WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 413 If you must use the accessories wipers defrosters etc while being towed the key must be in the ON position not the ACC position Make certain the transaxle remains in NEUTRAL Front Wheel Drive FWD Your vehicle may be towed under the following condi tions The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL the distance to be traveled must not exceed 15 mi 25 km and the towing speed must not exceed 25 mph 40 km h Exceeding these towing limits may cause a transaxle failure If the transaxle is not operative or if the vehicle is to be towed more than 15 mi 25 km the vehicle must be transported either with a flat bed truck or with the front wheels off the ground All Wheel Drive AWD Your vehicle may be towed under the following condi tions The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL the distance to be traveled must not exceed 15 mi 25 km the towing speed must not exceed 25 mph 40 km h and both front and rear wheels must be on the ground Exceeding these towing limits may cause a transaxle failure If the trans axle is not operative or if the vehicle is to be towed more than 15 mi 25 km the vehicle must be transported on a flat bed truck Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With A Tow Dolly Front Wheel Drive FWD Rear towing is not recommended with the front wheels on the ground as transaxle
260. hout stopping when you are stuck and don t let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed CAUTION Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transaxle overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h Do not spin the wheels continu ously for more than 30 seconds 412 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Without The Ignition Key Front Wheel Drive FWD Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position Flat bed towing is the preferred towing method However if a flat bed towing vehicle is not available a wheel lift towing vehicle may be used Furthermore rear towing is not recommended with the front wheels on the ground as transaxle damage can result If rear towing is the only alternative a front end dolly must be used Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle All Wheel Drive AWD Your vehicle must be transported on a flat bed truck Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flat Towing With The Key In The Ignition And All Four Wheels On The Ground CAUTION e If the vehicle being towed requires steering the ignition switch must be in the ON position not in the LOCK or ACC position Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front with sling type towing equipment Damage to the front fascia will result Do not push or tow this ve
261. hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capa bilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 328 STARTING AND OPERATING ME ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system commonly referred to as ESP This system includes Anti Lock Brake System ABS Brake Assist System BAS Traction Control System TCS Elec tronic Roll Mitigation ERM and Electronic Stability Pro gram ESP These systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions Anti Lock Brake System ABS The Anti Lock Brake System ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions The system automatically pumps the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent wheel lock up When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph 11 km h you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises These noises are the system per forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS is working properly This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph 11 km h ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loo
262. ia ke ehe 376 LOWE DD s RGR EES iride sol nihi on EI NNI RERO RR 376 ll Recreational Towing Behind Motorhome Etc 392 M Trailer Towing esee 377 S a ie el deen cee Common Towing Definitions 377 On The Ground ee STARTING AND OPERATING 307 STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the WARNING inside and outside mirrors fasten your seat belt and if e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving present instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a belts number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Don t leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Do not leave animals or children inside parked ve hicles in hot weather interior heat buildup may cause serious injury or death Be sure to turn OFF the engine and remove the key from the ignition switch if you want to rest or sleep in your car Accidents can be caused by inadvertently moving the shift lever Accidents can also be caused by pressing the accelerator pedal This may cause excessive heat in the exhaust system resulting in overheating and vehicle fire which may cause serious or fatal injuries 308 STARTING AND OPERATING EE The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK CAUTION position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes a D
263. icants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician 434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C system sealers stop leak products seal conditioners compressor oil and refrigerants A C Air Filter If Equipped Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for A C air filter service intervals WARNING Do not remove the A C air filter while the blower is operating or personal injury may result The A C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the glove box Perform the following steps to replace the filter
264. icle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will display in the EVIC for approximately 5 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the MENU button To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEM Trip Functions Press and release the MENU button until one of the following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC e Average Fuel Economy e Distance To Empty e Elapsed Time e Units In Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa tion e Average Fuel Economy
265. icle with the The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is eft side of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged stopped in an open area with the engine running for be sure the replacement cap has been designed for use more than a short period adjust the ventilation system with this vehicle to force fresh outside air into the vehicle EN STARTING AND OPERATING 373 CAUTION e Damage to the fuel system or emissions control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap gas cap A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into the fuel system A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc tion Indicator Light MIL to turn on To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap NOTE When removing the fuel filler cap lay the cap tether in the hook located on the fuel filler door rein forcement 374 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank filled Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is running A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling Failur
266. ide B Pillar P195 70R14 T125 70D15 200kPa 29PSI 420kPa 60PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AR 4N109268 J Tire And Loading Information Placard ne This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 811ad0d6 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and Tire Placard Location spare tires 342 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable shoul
267. idic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish Interior Care Instrument Panel Cover The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which minimizes reflections in the windshield Do not use protectants or other products which may cause undesirable reflections Use soap and warm water to restore the low glare surface Cleaning Interior Trim Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth a damp cloth with Mopar Total Clean then Mopar Spot amp Stain Remover if absolutely necessary Do not use harsh cleaners or Armorall Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery Cleaning Leather Upholstery Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 455 Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar Total Clean Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially fla
268. in 9 cm thick when it is inflated The Supplemental Front Seat Mounted Side Airbags are designed to activate only in certain side collisions When the ORC with side impact option detects a collision requiring the front seat mounted side airbag to inflate it signals the inflators on the crash side of the vehicle A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front seat mounted side airbag The inflat ing front seat mounted side airbag pushes through the seam in the seat s trim cover and opens into the space ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 between the occupant and the door The airbag inflates e Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket at a very high speed and with enough force to injure seat cover JOMAL you arene ee dua codec quercu OL e Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those items are positioned in the area where the front seat LEN TM approved by the manufacturer of this vehicle mounted side airbag inflates This especially applies to Mopar children e At no time should any supplemental restraint sys The following requirements must be strictly adhered tem SRS component or SRS related component or m fastener be modified or replaced with any part e Do not make any modifications to the front seat except those which are approved by the manufac components assembly or to the seat cover in any turer of this vehicle Mopar way e Do not use prior or future model ye
269. in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire Owners Manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cau tions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is on the left front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle the vehicle registration and the title s P dd VIN Location NOTE It is illegal to remove the VIN B08ce9e3 _ en INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS ua Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its road worthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS E Word About Your Keys 5 12 Wireless Ignition Node WIN 12 FOB With Integrated Key 13 Tip Start Feature 6 bane ee eee eee 14 Ignition Key Removal 00 14 Key In Ignition Reminder 15 H Sentry Key Immobilizer System 15 Replacement Keys 0 0 00 002005 16 Customer Key Programming 17 General Information sees H Security Alarm System If Equipped Rearming Of The System
270. in to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following 16 Digit Character format types PIDE Ape Display Poraa Type 16 Digit cu e Personality Ferny Display Public Public No program type or un None Rhythm and Blues R amp B defined iei i DIE GNIS Religious Music Rel Musc ult Hits PEE Religious Talk Rel Talk Classical Classicl Rock Rock Classic Rock Cls Rock Soft Soft caes ollege Soft Rock Soft Rck Country SRELEY Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Foreign Language Language Sports Sports i Lo ports spots Information Inform Talk Talk Jazz Jazz News News Top t M Weather Weather Nostalgia Nostalga Oldies Oldies en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type m
271. inates when ON See Note 9 Defrost Mode Button Press and release to select The indicator illuminates when ON 10 Front Blower Control Press the DOWN arrow to decrease or the UP arrow to increase front blower speed 11 SYNC Button Press and release to control the temperature setting for all three zones from the Left Front Temperature Control 296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL EBENEN Note To prevent window fogging Recirculation Mode will not operate when either Defrost or Mix mode is selected Doing so will cause the indicator to blink and then turn OFF 81dc95d4 Three Zone ATC Lower Control Panel 1 Rear Blower Control Press the DOWN arrow to decrease or the UP arrow to increase rear blower speed 2 Rear Temperature Control Provides independent temperature control for the rear cabin Turn left for cooler or right for warmer tempera ture settings in the rear cabin 3 Rear Mode Button Press the DOWN or UP arrow to change the mode of rear cabin air distribution to Floor Panel or Bi Level 4 REAR Button Turns the climate control in the overhead console above the second row passenger seats ON and OFF Press and release the button to change the current setting The indicator illuminates when ON en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297 5 Electric Rear Window Defroster Button 1 AUTO Refer to Rear Window Features in Section 3 for more Controls airflow temperature distribution and volume
272. inder Brakes 000 447 Methanol i e RR 8044 or gaa UA 369 Mini Trip Computer ensiteos nanena ar iaa 226 Mirrors cse or cera taera Esr e hx 88 163 Automatic Dimming llle 89 Electric Powered llle 90 INDEX Electric Remote Exterior Folding Heated Outside Rearview Vanity Mode Fuel Saver Modifications Alterations Vehicle Monitor Tire Pressure System Mopar Parts MP3 Player MTBE ETBE Multi Function Control Lever Navigation Radio Navigation System New Vehicle Break In Period 509 369 510 INDEX MMM Occupant Restraints 000000 39 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 368 474 Odometer THp crasg eiie d ER bee ie e teda 212 218 Oil Change Indicator 00 210 225 Oil Change Indicator Reset 210 225 Oil ENGINE 4 csse tuner eRe lk hog 424 474 Capacity 4k ee buo doe t ateri ss 472 Change Interval sester sassi imatas 210 225 426 Checking amp 25st kw ed eoe da C3 tete 424 Dipstck 3 5 uere rr ae P A Rp deg d 424 Disposal 52254 eti Rh EUER SR 428 Filter 22 4999 z4 ge ERR 4 0534 428 474 Filter Disposal 2 iiem mandati aa e ae 428 Identification Logo opus ds eoa piesa eee 426 Materials Added to 0000 427 Recommendation s 426 472 Synthetic ciate e Ee Pa ARE IR 427 MISCOSILY at bs ug ee toas aaa a 427 72 Oil Filter Changes i eee re Re Res 428 Oil Filter Selection llle 428
273. indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change Oil will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate This means that ser vice is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 mi 805 km es MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 479 NOTE Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the message after completing the scheduled oil change If this time since the last oil change Change your vehicles oil scheduled oil change is performed by someone other if it has been six months since your last oil change than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by even if the oil change indicator message is NOT referring to the steps described under Oil Change illuminated Required under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 or under Odometer Trip Odom eter under Instrument Cluster Descriptions in Section 4 e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehic
274. indicators first become visible 4 Keep the tires properly inflated 5 Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle Flowing Rising Water WARNING Do not drive on or cross a road or a path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flowing water can wear away the road or path s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you Shallow Standing Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water consider the following Caution and Warning before doing so 322 STARTING AND OPERATING EE CAUTION CAUTION e Always check the depth of the standing water e Driving through standing water may cause dam before driving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving
275. ined form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the combined form voice com mand Phonebook New Entry or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the UConnect system works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The UConnect system will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the UConnect system from idle simply press the PHONE button and follow the audible prompts for directions All UConnect system sessions begin with a press of the PHONE button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link UConnect System to a Cellular Phone To begin using your UConnect system you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your cellular phone
276. ing Inside Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light will illuminate next to the switch when the automatic dimming feature is activated x Automatic Dimming Mirror B1f1be98 CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror NOTE The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear and especially of the lane next to your vehicle 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death Outside Mirrors Folding Feature If Equipped Some models have exterior mirrors that are hinged The hinge
277. ing system only the approved lubricant may be used WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine OFF to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 437 Front Suspension Ball J oints There are two front suspension lower ball joints that are permanently lubricated Inspect these ball joints when other maintenance is performed A damaged seal and the corresponding potentially damaged ball joint must be replaced Steering Linkage The tie rod end ball joints should be inspected for external leakage and damage when other maintenance is performed Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including seat tracks door hinges liftgate hinges and hood hinges should be lubricated periodically to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the appli cation of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching compo nents to ensure proper function When perfor
278. ing the third row seats Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury On seven passenger models do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat with the second row seat back s folded flat In a collision the pu could e slide underneath the seat belt and seriously or even fatally injured en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 Lock Your Vehicle Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended even in your own driveway or garage Try to park your vehicle in a well lit area and never invite theft by leaving articles of value exposed Exhaust Gas WARNING e Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed If you are required to drive with the liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the blower switch on the climate control is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle bo
279. inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if nec 12 000 20 000 12 c essary H Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary 12 000 20 000 12 D Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped 12 000 20 000 12 7 Inspect the CV Joints Perform the first inspection at E 12 000 mi 20 000 km or 12 months ee ave i S Inspect the exhaust system Perform the first inspec 8 tion at 12 000 mi 20 000 km or 12 months pal aon di Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot 24 000 40 000 24 seals and replace if necessary Replace the engine air cleaner filter 30 000 50 000 30 482 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES EE Perform Maintenance Every Where time and mileage are listed follow the interval that occurs first Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months Replace the spark plugs on 2 4L and 2 7L engines 30 000 50 000 30 Change Rear Drive Assembly RDA fluid 60 000 100 000 60 Change Power Transfer Unit PTU fluid 60 000 100 000 60 Change the automatic transaxle fluid and filter if us ing your vehicle for any of the following police taxi 60 000 100 000 60 fleet or frequent trailer towing Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary t 90 000 150 000 90 Flush and replace the engine coolant 102 000 170 000 60 Replace the spark plugs on 3 5L engines 102 000 170 000 102 Replace the timing belt on 3 5L engines 102 000 170 000 102 Change the automatic transaxle fluid and filter 120 000 200 000 120
280. io will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob aga
281. ion Example P215 65R15 95H STARTING AND OPERATING 337 European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H e LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Temporary spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT 338 STARTING AND OPERATING EE Tire Sizing Chart TIRE SIZING TERMS Size Designation P Passenger Car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger Car tire based on European design standards LT Light Truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent 76 Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Secti
282. ion To do so pull the latch release loop located at the top of the WARNING seatback upward allow the seatback to recline and e Be certain that the seatback is locked securely into release the release loop position Otherwise the seat will not provide the proper stability for passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury Do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat without having the head restraint unfolded and locked in place Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury to the passenger in the event of an accident Do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat with the second row seatback s folded flat In a collision the passenger could slide underneath the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD Outside of the vehicle locate the safety latch lever near Two latches must be released to open the hood First pull the center of the grille between the grille and hood the hood release lever located under the left side of the opening Push the safety latch lever to the right and then instrument panel raise the hood Hood Release Underhood Safety Latch en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open To prevent possible damage position Place the upper end of the prop rod in the hole on the underside of the hood e Before c
283. is button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone UConnect If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to Satellite Radio in this section Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide SALES CODE REU MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate The REU Multimedia system contains a radio Sirius Satellite Radio player navigation system six disc CD DVD player USB port 30 gigabyte hard drive HDD and the UConnect Hands Free Bluetooth cellular sys tem A 7 in 17 8 cm remote screen allows easy menu selec tion while the Advanced Voice Dialog System recognizes more than 1 000 words for audio navigation entertain ment and hands free mobile phone use The satellite navigation capability combines a Global Positioning System GPS based navigation system with en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267 a remote color screen to provide maps turn identifica tion selection menus and instructions for selecting a variety of destinations and routes A shared HDD for the navigation system the database and other radio feature
284. ise until you hear the winch mechanism click three times It cannot be over tightened 13 Stow the jack handle and jack 14 Check the tire pressure as soon as possible Adjust the tire pressure as required Wheel Nuts Tighten all wheel nuts occasionally to eliminate the possibility of wheel studs being sheared or the bolt holes in the wheels becoming elongated This is especially important during the first few hundred miles kilome ters of operation and after changing a tire This allows the wheel nuts to seat properly All wheel nuts should first be firmly seated against the wheel The wheel nuts should then be tightened to recommended torque Tighten the wheel nuts to the final torque in increments Progress around the bolt circle tightening the nut oppo site of the one you previously tightened until the final torque is achieved Recommended torque is 95 ft Ibs 130 Nm ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 407 JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES WARNING WARNING e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON You can be hurt by the fan e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes skin or cloth ing Don t lean over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush contami nated area immediately with large quantities of water Do not attempt to push or
285. itch will not operate when the key is in the ignition and either front door is open A chime will sound as a reminder to remove the key Automatic Door Locks The doors will lock automatically if all of the following conditions are met The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled The transaxle is in gear All doors are closed The throttle is pressed The vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h and oT A C N e 6 The doors were not previously locked using the power door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry RKE trans mitter ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 Automatic Door Locks If Equipped The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer See your authorized dealer for programming Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit The doors will unlock automatically if 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en abled 2 The transaxle was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h 3 The transaxle is in NEUTRAL or PARK 4 The driver s door is opened 5 The doors were not previously unlocked and 6 The vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Per sonal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 e For vehicles n
286. ith or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UConnect message will display on the radio screen Phone Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hands Free Phone UConnect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free mm Communication UConnect9 in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UConnect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button and the time of day will display In AM or FM mode pressing the TIME button will switch between the time and frequency displays 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save the time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting the SET HOME CLOCK entry Once in this display follow the above procedure starting at step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The rad
287. kg 3 5L with cludes 3 to 4 persons amp Luggage Trailer Tow ig ol 250 Ibs 113 kg Prep Package 83001bs 3765 kg 40 sq ft 3 7 sq m 2900 wa bri kg Mr in Except for AHT cludes 5 to 6 persons uggage AWD models 100 Ibs 113 kg Except for AWD models NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to the Tire Safety Information Section in this manual NOTE For All Wheel Drive AWD models carrying 5 to 7 persons and luggage will exceed the rear Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR and therefore should not be attempted 2 500 Ibs 1 134 kg which in 8 300 Ibs 3 765 kg 40 sq ft 3 7 sq m a6 7 persons amp Luggage 384 STARTING AND OPERATING Trailer and Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents TOW i Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on HEIGHT your bumper or trailer hitch E I E 81546c40 Consider the following it
288. l door lock plungers on the door trim panels or the door lock cylinder on the driver s door To open the unlocked liftgate squeeze the handle and pull the liftgate toward you Gas props will raise and support the liftgate in the open position 81cfe12d Liftgate Release NOTE Because the gas pressure drops with tempera ture it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather e Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison ous exhaust gases into your vehicle These fumes could injure you and your passengers Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle If you are required to drive with the liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the blower switch on the climate control is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems The following safety features are standard on your vehicle e Front airbags for both the driver and front passenger THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 Supplemental side curtain airbags for the driver and passengers seated next to a window Supplemental front seat mounted side airbags An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel Knee Bolsters Blockers for front seat occupants Three point lap and shoulder belts for all seating positions Pretensioning and load limiting retractors for the fr
289. l hole at the end of component 3 This will lock these components together Assemble components 1 and 2 so that the wheel nut socket at the end of component 1 faces upward when seated on component 2 This will make it easier to rotate the assembly when operating the winch mechanism 2 Fit the assembled jack handle over the winch drive nut located in the jack storage area Rotate the jack handle assembly counterclockwise until there is enough cable slack to allow you to pull the cable and retainer out from underneath the vehicle CAUTION The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack handle only Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and it can damage the winch 3 Place the spare tire near to the winch cable Hold the spare upright so that the tire s tread is on the ground and the valve stem is at the top of the wheel and facing away from the rear of the vehicle EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 401 4 Tilt the retainer at the end of the winch cable and drop 5 Fit the assembled jack handle over the winch drive it through the center of the wheel Then place the spare nut Rotate the jack handle assembly clockwise to raise tire with the cable and retainer underneath the vehicle the spare tire into the storage area Continue to rotate the T jack handle assembly until you hear the winch mecha nism click three times It cannot be over tightened Push against the tire several times to be sure it is held
290. l in snow or icy conditions e Avoid using speed control when Autostick is en gaged e The transaxle will automatically shift up when maxi mum engine speed is reached while Autostick is engaged Transaxle shifting will be more noticeable when Autostick is engaged ee STARTING AND OPERATING 319 e Ifa low range is selected and the engine accelerates to the rev limit the transaxle will automatically select the next higher ratio e If a downshift would cause the engine to over speed that shift will not occur until it is safe for the engine Mostly the transaxle will stay in the manually selected ratio however If the system detects powertrain overheating the transaxle will revert to the automatic shift mode and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off If the system detects a problem it will disable the AutoStick mode and the transaxle will return to the automatic mode until the problem is corrected ALL WHEEL DRIVE AWD IF EQUIPPED This feature provides on demand All Wheel Drive AWD The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required Under normal driving conditions the front wheels provide most of the traction If the front wheels begin to lose traction power is shifted automatically to the rear wheels The greater the front wheel traction loss the greater the power transfer to the rear wheels Additionally on dry pavement under heavy throttle input w
291. l property rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone UConnect If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in SSUBUR E unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If engineering or disassembly is prohibited E Led llite Radio in this section D E PUE E DTS and DTS 2 0 are trademarks of Digital The Operating Instructions Video Entertainment ater Systems Inc System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide 254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEM SALES CODE RES AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate Ca RND SINGLE DISC MP3 PUSH ON PUSH AUDIO SELECT VOLUME Lord TUNE SCROLL 81c7c564 RES Radio Non Satellite Model Shown With Satellite Similar Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the On Volume control knob to turn on the radio Push the On Volume control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The elect
292. l still function However the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system operating WARNING e Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot rest ing or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You wouldn t have your full braking capacity in an emergency Driving a vehicle with the Brake System Warning Light on is dangerous A significant decrease in braking performance or vehicle stability during braking may occur It will take you longer to stop the vehicle or will make your vehicle harder to control You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately ee STARTING AND OPERATING 327 Anti Lock Brake System ABS WARNING This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock up to from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ABS Refer to Anti Lock Brake System ABS under Elec cannot prevent accidents including those resulting tronic Brake Control System in this section for more from excessive speed in turns driving on very slip information pery surfaces or
293. le within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time 274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se INFO Button Except REU Radio Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional thr
294. le and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle you should always shift the vehicle into PARK remove the key from the ignition and apply the parking brake Once the key is removed from the igni tion the shift lever is locked in the PARK position securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Fur thermore you should never leave unattended children inside a vehicle Brake Transaxle Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transaxle Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the shift lever in the PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the ignition switch must be turned to the ON position and the brake pedal must be depressed BTSI Override There is an override for the BTSI that allows you to move the shift lever out of the PARK position if an electrical system malfunction occurs i e dead battery To activate the override system perform the following steps 1 Firmly apply the parking brake 2 Insert the ignition key into the ignition switch and rotate it to the ON position 3 Remove the cubby bin liner located in the center console behind the shift lever
295. le off road for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 mi 10 000 km or six months whichever comes first M A l N U E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 480 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MM At Each Stop for Fuel At Each Oil Change e Check the engine oil level Refer to Engine Oil under e Change the engine oil filter Mai P A53 ion 7 Maintenance Procedures in Section Inspect the brake hoses and lines e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required CAUTION Once a Month Failure to perform the required maintenance items e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or may result in damage to the vehicle damage Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required e Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir brake master cylinder power steering and transaxle and add as needed M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 481 H Required Maintenance Intervals Perform Maintenance Every Where time and mileage r are listed follow the interval that occurs first Y Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 6 000 10 000 6 C Rotate the tires 6 000 10 000 6 E If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions S
296. ll on your cellular phone the UConnect system will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the PHONE button to accept the call To reject ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 the call press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell phone Press the PHONE button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The UConnect system compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making a Second Call While Current Call in Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the Voice Recognition button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Conference Call in this section Place Retrieve a Call From Hold To put a call on hold press the PHONE button until you hear a
297. lled automatically and it will CAUTION decrease as the engine warms up ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED Damage to the transaxle may occur if the following The engine block heater warms engine coolant and precautions are not observed permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a a complete stop grounded three wire extension cord Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the The engine block heater cord is bundled under the hood between the headlight assembly and the Totally Inte grated Power Module Fuse Box on the driver s side of the vehicle WARNING Remember to disconnect the cord before driving vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal Damage to the 110 115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution 312 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN NOTE You MUST press and hold the brake pedal down while shifting out of PARK WARNING It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehic
298. llful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar dize the user s safety or the safety of others Electronic Stability Program ESP This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESP cor rects for over steering and under steering the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path The ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path the ESP applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the condition of over steer or under steer e Over steer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Under steer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position ESP TCS Indicator Light The ESP TCS Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes EN STARTING AND OPERATING 333 active The ESP TCS Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESP TCS Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little thr
299. lock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set 268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEM Changing the Time Zone NOTE You can skip Steps 2 and 3 by pressing and holding the TIME button on the radio for three sec onds 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Press and release the SETUP button on the radio 3 If Time Setup is highlighted on the menu press and release the joystick in the center of the radio Otherwise turn the knob surrounding the joystick to select Time Setup and then press and release the joystick 4 Turn the knob surrounding the joystick to scroll to Time Zone and then press and release the joystick 5 If the desired time zone setting has a check mark next to it proceed to the next step Otherwise turn the knob surrounding the joystick to select the desired time zone setting and then press and release the joystick A check mark will display next to the selection 6 Press and release the SETUP button to exit the screen Changing Daylight Savings Time When On is selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting NOTE You can skip Steps 2 and 3 by pressing and holding the TIME button on the radio for three sec onds 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Press and release the SETUP button on the radio ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR
300. losing hood make sure the hood prop rod is fully seated into its storage retaining clips e Do notslam the hood to close it Use a firm downward push at the center front edge of the hood to ensure that 3 both latches engage Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged WARNING If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before driving Failure to follow this warning may lead to an Hood Prop Rod accident resulting in serious injury or death 81d014ae 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M LIGHTS Exterior and Interior Lighting Control x The multifunction lever on the left side of the N steering column controls the operation of the headlights parking lights turn signal lights in strument panel lights instrument panel light dimming interior lights and fog lights if equipped Headlights and Parking Lights Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent for parking light operation Turn the end of the lever to the second detent for headlight operation 81f4ec04 Headlight Switch ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 Automatic Headlights If Equipped This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels To turn the system ON turn the end of the multifunction lever to the AUTO
301. loudy or dark set the Mode control at or near COOL OR COLD Press the z amp button to turn recirculate off HUMID CONDITIONS If it s sunny set the Mode control at or between and then turn the air 6466 6 conditioning on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near and turn 6 46 pls the air conditioning on If the windows begin to fog set Mode control at or between 5 and S COLD DRY Set the Mode control at ot near 3 If it is Sunny you may want more upper air In CONDITIONS this case set the Mode control at or between and 2 In very cold weather i if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control at or near the 3 81e19ad1 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS H Starting Procedures 0000 307 Brake Transaxle Interlock System 312 Automatic Transaxle 00 308 Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock Normal Starting Tip Start 309 E D M aries oe Below 20 F Or 29 C 000005 309 If Engine Fails To Start o u o gig OR RGN e sees eendedaries d After Starting cess 311 AE EA DOIRBLOUE obest ee diste nm Bl Engine Block Heater I Equipped
302. ls and the radio will tune to the next station matching the selected format There is no time out for this screen Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button again will close the MUSIC TYPE screen Once closed seek up seek down and scan will no longer be based on your selection SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1
303. m e gee p4 oar eta td tee eee 382 Recreational leen 392 Weight lene E RR UR Res 382 Towing Assistance sar acsnrsa ii i 106 en INDEX 517 Towing Vehicle Behind a Motor Home 392 Traction xe daw9 eS whe REX XR ERE 320 Traction Control llle 215 331 Trailer Sway Control TSC 335 Trader TOWNE is see see e e wise Ack eee a 377 Cooling System Tips 000 392 Hitches 12 ge marea ES RnC alk ahead 381 Minimum Requirements llus 385 TIDS isses deed igo ee os Pel ER teas NE 390 Trailer and Tongue Weight 384 Witt 8 cia dace x ars aed Wale deg CUR ae does 388 Trailer Towing Guide 005 382 Trailer Weight oo 2224 fee cued RI RR 382 Transaxle Additives ce i a ended oe eoe cx EX 451 Automatic 2 0 0 0 0 0 eee 311 449 Autostick i i REI ele a eae aes 317 Filters sia pere dE MARQUE ake od Be wg 451 Maintenance llle 449 OperdiOn sais Det ex ducem wer ce e eas 311 Overdrive iie e e e rp a e 315 Selection of Lubricant llle 476 Transmission eee See Transaxle Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 00 25 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 0 0 0 0 eee eee 163 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry 0004 20 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE 20 Transporting Pets 22e esas pers tes 77 Tread Wear Indicators
304. mal range indicates that the cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a high temperature when driving in hot weather up mountain grades in heavy traffic or when towing a trailer If the pointer rises to the H mark safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the Air Conditioning A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transaxle into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle If the needle remains on the H mark turn the engine OFF immediately and call for service See page 394 for more information NOTE The gauge pointer will remain near its last reading when the engine is turned off It will return to a true reading when the engine is restarted CAUTION Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the en gine running as you would not be able to react to the temperature indicator light if the engine overheats 2 Fuel Gauge The fuel gauge shows the level of fuel in the tank when ignition switch is in the ON position 3 Fuel Cap Indicator This symbol indicates the side of the vehicle lt where the fuel filler cap is located 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEM E This ight vade of an Aa E This light warns of an overheated engine condi CAUTION A tion If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transaxle into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle If the temperature reading does not with the A C
305. may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade WARNING Never use PARK position on an Automatic Transaxle as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage CAUTION DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL positions into another gear range as this can damage the drivetrain REVERSE Use REVERSE for moving the vehicle rearward Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop EE STARTING AND OPERATING 315 NEUTRAL The engine may be started in this range WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have an accident DRIVE 6 Speed Transaxle This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts downshifts and best fuel economy However use the AutoStick mode and select the 5 range when frequent transaxle shifting occurs while using the DRIVE range such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions ie in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers Under these con
306. ming other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield and rear window periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumulations of salt waxes or road film and help reduce streaking and smearing 7 438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield or rear window Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield or rear window Make sure that they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid damaging the blade Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Always refer to the wiper blade packaging for specific installation instructions Many wiper blade re placements fit multiple vehicles Windshield Washers Rear Window Washer NOTE Refer to the appropriate Engine Compartment diagram in Section 7 for the location of the washer fluid reservoir Th
307. mmable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped YES Essentials seats may be cleaned in the following manner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel e For tough stains apply Mopar Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply Mopar Multi Purpose Cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any solvents or protectants on Yes Essen tials products 456 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abr
308. n 3 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Clock Setting Procedure Setting the Clock 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 4 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed To move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed 5 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the multimedia system
309. n Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the ve hicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler LLC vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and main tenance procedures as well as specifications capabili ties and safety tips ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 493 Call toll free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387
310. n cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunc tioning and may require immediate service Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance e The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer NOTE Intentional tampering with the emissions con trol system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you 372 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN Carbon Monoxide Warnings e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte nance Have the exhaust system inspected every time WARNING the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly windows fully open Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex haust gases from entering the vehicle e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless Ru op A which can kill ADDING FUEL Never run the engine in a closed area such as a Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap garage and never sit in a parked veh
311. n of this manual ee STARTING AND OPERATING 347 CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap if equipped This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always mm cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 Tire Placard Location mi 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damageatleast tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure DO NOT make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated 811ad0d6 Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes 348 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the Winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature
312. n the ON or ACC position NOTE e For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Open ing either front door will cancel this feature e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Key Off Power Delay under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 WARNING Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unattended children can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death Auto Down Feature The driver s power window switch has an Auto down feature Press the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee To open the window part way press the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop To stop the window from going all the way down during the Auto down operation pull up on the switch briefly Auto Up
313. nal Light Out with a single chime e Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e RKE Battery Low with a single chime Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle Not in PARK 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee Channel Transmit Refer to Garage Door Opener in Section 2 Channel Training Refer to Garage Door Opener in Section 2 Channel Trained Refer to Garage Door Opener in Section 2 Clearing Channels Refer to Garage Door Opener in Section 2 Channels Cleared Refer to Garage Door Opener in Section 2 Did Not Train Refer to Garage Door Opener in Section 2 Left Front Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to information on Tire Pressure and Tire Pressure Monitor in Section 5 Left Rear Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to information on Tire Pressure and Tire Pressure Monitor in Section 5 Right Front Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to information on Tire Pressure and Tire Pressure Monitor in Section 5 Right Rear Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to information on Tire Pressure and Tire Pressure Monitor in Section 5 Check TPM System with a single chime Refer to information on Tire Pressure Monitor in Section 5 Low Fuel Cal Oil Change Required with a single chime Low Washer Fluid en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 e Coolant Low e Key in Ignition e Lights On Oil Change Required Your veh
314. nce e This device must accept any interference received includ ing interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 A weak battery in the transmitter The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry RKE trans mitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a targeted range of 328 ft 100 m NOTE The vehicle must be equipped with an auto matic transaxle to be equipped with Remote Start How To Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start e Shift lever in PARK e Doors closed e Hood closed e Liftgate closed e HAZARD switch off e BRAKE switch inactive brake pedal not pressed e Ignition key removed from ignition switch e Battery at an acceptable charge level and Press and release the REMOTE START button will honk twice if programmed Then the NOTE e RKE PANIC button not presse
315. nd of component 2 in the small hole at the end of component 3 This will lock these components together Assemble components 1 and 2 so that the wheel nut socket at the end of component 1 faces upward when seated on component 2 This will make it easier to rotate the assembly when operating the winch mechanism 2 Fit the assembled jack handle over the winch drive nut located in the jack storage area Rotate the jack handle assembly counterclockwise until the spare tire is on the ground with enough cable slack to allow you to pull the spare tire out from underneath the vehicle CAUTION The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack handle only Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and it can damage the winch 3 Pull the spare tire out from underneath the vehicle and raise it upright so the tire s tread is on the ground ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 399 4 Tilt the retainer at the end of the winch cable and Spare Tire Stowage aah DEUM CUT E NOTE On Seven Passenger Models fold the third row i passenger seats flat This will provide more space when accessing the jacking tools and when operating the winch mechanism 1 Remove the jack handle components 1 2 and 3 from storage and assemble them Spare Tire Retainer 400 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EBENEN Lowering Raising Spare Tire NOTE Assemble components 2 and 3 by seating the small ball at the end of component 2 in the smal
316. nd or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263 a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates 264 UND
317. nd pressure together to disengage the taillight housing from the vehicle ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 469 4 Rotate the applicable bulb s electrical connector 4 turn counterclockwise and remove it from the taillight housing 81dd40b0 1 Tail Stop Light Bulb 2 Rear Turn Signal Light Bulb 5 Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install the replacement bulb 6 Install the bulb and connector assembly into the taillight housing and rotate the connector 1 4 turn clock wise to lock it in place 7 Reinstall the taillight housing and fasteners Changing the Tail Light or Backup Light 1 Open the liftgate 2 Remove the two fasteners retaining the taillight hous ing to the liftgate from the inboard face of the liftgate 3 Carefully insert a trim stick plastic flat blade tool between the taillight housing and the liftgate Use the trim stick and hand pressure together to disengage the taillight housing from the liftgate 4 Rotate the applicable bulb s electrical connector 1 4 turn counterclockwise and remove it from the housing 470 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Bo 5 Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install the replacement bulb 81dd40b7 1 Tail Light Bulb 2 Backup Light Bulb 6 Install the bulb and connector assembly into the housing and rotate the connector turn clockwise to lock it in place 7 Reinstall the taillight housing and fasteners Licens
318. ne compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Catalytic Converter The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device 430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage CAUTION Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involv ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor mance have your vehicle serviced promptly Contin ued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and the vehicle NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn e
319. ne is running serious conditions may exist that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage See page 421 for more information CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emissions control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required 25 Electronic Stability Program ESP Brake Assist System BAS Malfunction Indicator Light If Equipped The yellow ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator ESP Light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position The light should go out with the engine running The system will turn the light on continuously while the engine is run ning if it detects a malfunction in either the ESP or the BAS or both If this light remains on after the several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected See page 328 for more information ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 26 Brake System Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions BRAKE including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the light t
320. ner H Equipped cec teat s Electronic Speed Control Operation 159 n a a pete eer a 268 To ACtivate s ceps ep ERE mper PER US 159 DOE DDEAGUCODIUATDIOEIAMIERDS qapss 0f 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Using Homelink sssssss 168 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink DUttODi 5o odes sb be S E aes REY S 168 D CUFILY ian ba rane a ee ae Seats a teca Seas 169 Troubleshooting Tips 000 169 General Information 0 169 ower Sunroof If Equipped 170 Opening Sunroof Manually 171 Opening Sunroof Express 171 Closing Sunroof Manually 171 Closing Sunroof Express 172 Pinch Protect Feature 040 172 Pinch Protect Override Venting Sunroof Express 172 Sunshade Operation 000 173 Wind Buffeting 0 00 173 Sunroof Maintenance 05 173 Ignition Off Operation 6 173 Sunroof Fully Closed 0 0 174 li Electrical Power Outlets 00 0 174 Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off 176 ll Power Inverter If Equipped 176 E Cup And Bottle Holders 0 178 Cupholders llle 178 Bottle Holders exse Rem 179
321. nition Run 7 Accessory Relay VEHICLE STORAGE f T If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21 B Toton Kun Relay days you may want to take steps to preserve your batte K3 Starter Solenoid Relay o im y ps to p y Sr K4 Ignition Run Start m Relay e Remove the IOD Ignition Off Draw mini fuses from K5 i NGC Powertrain the Totally Integrated Power Module located in the Control Module Relay engine compartment Or disconnect the batter negative cable ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 465 REPLACEMENT BULBS All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb Number Courtesy Reading Lights Incandescent 578 Courtesy Reading Lights Optional LED LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Glove Box Light pesien ae a e e ra 194 Cargo Eight eer E de bak edant 579 Optional Door Map Pocket Cupholder Lighting LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer NOTE For lighted switches see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions LIGHTS BULBS Outside Bulb No Low Beam Headlight 9006 High Beam Headlight 9005 Front Park Turn Signal 3757AK Side Marker Light eer cesi ee eee 168 Front Fog Light 9145 H10 Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL 22 6 24744 LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Rear Tail Sto
322. nk button while you press and release every two seconds cycle your hand held transmitter until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink earlier in this section Using HomeLink To operate simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device ie garage door opener gate operator Security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To re program a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming Homelink Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes Note that all channels will be erased Individual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Uni
323. nnect allows you to transfer calls between the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation The UConnect phonebook enables you to store up to 32 names with four numbers per name Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language This system is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free profile cellular phone UConnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station so UConnect works no matter where you stow your cellular phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s UConnect system The UConnect system allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired cellular phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 Phone Button The rearview mirror contains the microphone KM for the system depending on the type of mirror and radio equipped and either the radio or the mirror has the two control buttons PHONE Button and VOICE RECOGNITION button that will enable you to access the system Voice Recognition Button Actual button location may vary with radio e The individual buttons are d
324. nnect Link Between the UConnect System and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a UConnect paired cellular phone and the UConnect system follow the instructions de scribed in your cellular phone User s Manual List Paired Cellular Phone Names e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted say List Phones e The UConnect system will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To select or delete a paired phone being announced press the Voice Recogni tion button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sections for an alternate way to select or delete a paired phone Select Another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the UConnect system e Press the PHONE button to begin en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts e You can also press the Voice Recognition button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select The selected phone will be used
325. not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 Ibs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg but are There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat less than one year old Both types of child restraints are for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the child LATCH child restraint anchor system Refer to ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 LATCH Child Seat Anchor System Lower An chors and Tether for CHildren in this section
326. nroof is in the position Injury may result desired and it will stop moving If you continue to hold 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M the switch in the forward position the sunroof will close fully and then stop automatically Release the switch once the sunroof stops moving Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction ice debris etc prevents closing press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after the reversal occurs This allows the sunroof to move towards the closed position NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the V button in the center of the switch and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent which operates regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation an
327. ns ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence do not pump the brakes Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions BAS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ee STARTING AND OPERATING 331 Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one w
328. nt or equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the warning have been established for the tire size TEMPS dom funcHonine properly always check the equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera TPMS malfunction telltale light after replacing one or tion or sensor damage may result when using re more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the placement equipment that is not of the same size replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly See page 355 for more information type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result Refer to Tire Inflation Pressures under Tires General Information and to Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS in Section 5 for more information 22 Anti Lock Brake System ABS Warning Light This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System 8s ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the Brake System Warning Light is
329. o a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the front seat 2 The seat belt latch plate is along side the pillar near the back of your seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt go around your lap Pulling Out Lap Shoulder Belt en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 3 When the belt is long enough to fit adn the latch WARNING plate into the buckle until you hear a click Y A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder
330. o perform all service operations in an expert manner Service manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these service manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed maintenance intervals there are other items that should operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance However if a malfunction of these items does occur it could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance These items should be inspected if a malfunction is observed or suspected Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425 The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Do not check oil le
331. oad appropriately Long loads which extend over the windshield such as wood panels or surfboards or loads with large frontal area should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle Place a blanket or other protection between the sur face of the roof and the load Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack Wind forces due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic can add sudden upward lift to loads This is especially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS Bi Instrument Panel Features 203 Compass Display 4322s er bs B Instrument Cluster osse i Rn 204 Personal Settings Customer Programmable B Instrument Cluster Descriptions 205 Hehe sspadtdtsquup ete eee eee syst xd H Hicctonie Vabicle Information Center TEVIC Bl Radio General Information 233 If Eqdipped llle 221 Radio Broadcast Signals 233 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Two Types Of Signals 233 DEL A See RRA Ne sires ae SRAM Taie d Electrical Disturbance 233 Oil Change Required 0 225 AM Reception cccccceeeeeeeees 233 HUE HONE S espeequiteteiebaqdudesd id s FM Reception isses 234 2
332. ode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items NOTE Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll through the entries Push the AUDIO SELECT button to select an entry and make changes e DVD Enter When the disc is in DVD Menu mode selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current highlighted selection Use the remote control to scroll up and down the menu if equipped gt II e DVD Play Options Selecting the DVD Play Options will display the following e DISC Play Pause You can toggle between playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT button if equipped e Subtitle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch subtitles to different subtitle languages that are available on the disc if equipped e Audio Stream Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch to different audio languages if supported on the disc if equipped 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEM e Angle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc if equipped NOTE The available selections for each of the above entries varies depending upon the disc NOTE These selections can only be made while playing a DVD e VES Power Allows you to turn VES ON and OFF if equipped e VES Lock Locks out rear VES remote controls if equipped
333. oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the TRIP ODOMETER button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following pro cedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure 16 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Warning Light If Equipped This light will turn on briefly as a bulb check A when the ignition switch is turned ON This light will also turn on while the engine is running if there is a problem with the Elec tronic Throttle Control ETC system If the light turns on while the engine is running safely bring the vehicle to a complete stop as soon as possible place the shift lever in PARK and cycle the ignition key The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable However see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashin
334. old or snowy condi tions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield e Defrost Qv Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets For vehicles equipped with a three zone system air is directed through the floor outlet in the right quarter trim panel unless the climate control for the rear passengers is ON and in Panel mode NOTE Use this mode with maximum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side win dow defrosting e Recirculation Control Use this button to block the flow of outside air from coming into the passenger compartment UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287 NOTE e Only use the Recirculation mode as a temporary means to block out any outside odors smoke or dust and to cool the interior rapidly upon initial start up in very hot or humid weather e Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended e The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture build up inside the vehicle Select the outside air position for maximum defogging 288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Single Zone Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System 81dca244 Single Zone Manual Climate Control 1 Blower Control The blower s
335. ollow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph Engine Oil Overheating 2 4L Gas and 2 0L Diesel Engines Only If Equipped On hot days the engine oil temperature may become too hot during sustained high speed driving or if towing a trailer up long grades If this happens a HOTOIL mes sage will flash in the odometer and the vehicle speed will be reduced to 48 mph 77 km h maximum until the engine oil temperature is reduced NOTE Although the maximum vehicle speed is re duced to 48 mph 77 km h you may of course reduce vehicle speed further as needed Im 396 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME J ACKING AND TIRE CHANGING J ack Location The jack and jack handle are stowed underneath a cover WARNING in the rear storage bin in the cargo area e Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel Getting under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for servi
336. ommands can be used depending upon the active application For example if you are in the disc menu and you are listening to FM radio you can speak commands from the disc menu or from the FM radio menu When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear the first available Menu press the VR hard key and say HELP or MAIN MENU Commands The Voice Recognition System understands two types of commands Global commands are available at all times Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active Changing the Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the VR hard key 2 Say a command e g HELP 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the voice recognition system is speaking Please note the volume setting for VR is different then the audio system 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Main Menu Start a dialogue by pressing the VR hard key You may say MAIN MENU to switch to the main menu In this mode you can say the following commands e RADIO to switch to the radio mode e DISC to switch to the disc mode e MEMO to switch to the memo recorder Radio AM or Radio Long Wave or Ra
337. on tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 496 INDEX BEEN About Your Brakes liess 323 326 ABS Anti Lock Brake System 215 327 328 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 442 Adding Fuel 2 24002 200 94 m ged ds 372 Adding Rear Washer Fluid 194 Adding Washer Fluid 157 194 438 Additives Fuel 0 000 e eee eee 371 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter
338. on width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in ee STARTING AND OPERATING 339 TIRE SIZING TERMS Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL Tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load Light load tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 340 STARTING AND OPERATING EE TIRE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not f
339. ont seat belts to enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event All seat belt systems except the driver s and second row center position include Automatic Locking Re tractors ALRs 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee If you will be carrying children too small for adult size belts your seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for Children LATCH feature can also be used to hold infant and child restraint systems Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the v
340. ont airbag is mounted in the top of the instrument panel The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers 8114d757 1 Driver s Airbag 2 Front Passenger s Airbag 3 Knee Bolsters NOTE The front airbags are certified to the Federal regulations that allow less forceful deployment THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 The front airbags have a multistage inflator design This may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity WARNING e Do not put anything on or around the front airbag covers or attempt to open them You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags are no longer functional These protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflating Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizens band radios etc 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se This vehicle also has supplemental side curtain airbags to protect the driver and passengers sitting next to a win dow and supplemental front seat mounted side airbags The supplemental side curtain airbags are located above the side windows Their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open to allow airbag deployment The s
341. or Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 489 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 4568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its Customer Center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for an vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s Service Contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s Service Contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hot line at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s Service Contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s Servi
342. or the door LOCK cylinder on the driver s door 3 Close all doors The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to signal that the system is arming During this period opening any door or the liftgate will cancel the arming process If the system arms successfully the Vehicle Security Light will flash at a slower rate to indicate the alarm is set NOTE For added security whenever the Security Alarm is armed the HomeLink Garage Door Opener if equipped is disabled as well To Disarm the System Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or insert a valid ignition key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position NOTE e Unlocking the doors with the manual door LOCK plungers or the door LOCK cylinder on the driver s door will not disarm the system e When the system is armed the interior power door LOCK switches will not unlock the doors The Security Alarm System is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm If the previously described arming sequence has occurred the system will 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee arm regardless of whether you are inside or outside the vehicle If you remain inside the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the system Tamper Alert If something has triggered the alarm in your absenc
343. ot equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Enter the vehicle and close all doors 2 Place the key in the ignition switch 3 Within 15 seconds cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position However do not start the engine 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M 4 Within 30 seconds depress the power door unlock switch to unlock the doors 5 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming NOTE If you do not hear the chime it means that the system did not enter the programming mode and you will need to repeat the procedure 6 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the rear doors are equipped with a Child Protection Door Lock system To Engage the Child Protection Door Lock System 1 Open the rear door 2 Insert the tip of the valet key or alike into the child lock control and rotate it to the LOCK position Child Lock Control 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 NOTE When the Child Protection Door Lock system is engaged the door can be opened only by using the outside door handle even thou
344. ote Start request DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks To lock each door push the door lock plunger on each door trim panel downward To unlock each door pull the door lock plunger on each door trim panel upward ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 WARNING e For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors before you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition and lock your vehicle Unsuper vised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries and death Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a 81d10bf0 Door Lock Plunger number of reasons A child or others could be If the door lock plunger is down when you shut the door seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key in the door will lock Therefore make sure the key is not the ignition A child could operate power win inside the vehicle before closing the door dows other controls or move the vehicle NOTE The manual door locks will not lock or unlock the liftgate 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ge Power Door Locks A power door lock switch is on each front door trim panel Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate Power Door Lock Switch 81d10bf4 To prevent you from locking your key in the vehicle the power door lock sw
345. ottle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions WARNING ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESP cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ESP Operating Modes The ESP system has two available operating modes Full On This is the normal operating mode for ESP Whenever the vehicle is started the system will be in this mode This mode should be used for most driving situations ESP should only be turned to Partial Off for specific reasons as noted Refer to Partial Off for additional informa tion Partial Off The ESP OFF button is located in the switch bank above the climate Control To enter the Partial Off mode momentarily depress the ESP OFF button and the ESP TCS Indicator Light will illuminate To turn the ESP on again momentarily depress the ESP OFF button and the ESP TCS Indicator Light will turn off This will restore the normal ESP On mode of operation 334 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN 81dcfda9 ESP OFF Button NOTE
346. ound on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire TIRE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety stan dards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 STARTING AND OPERATING 341 TIRE LOADING AND TIRE PRESSURE Tire and Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location f SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCC NEVER EXCEED XXX F NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on either the face of the driver s door or the driver s s
347. ower Steering Fluid 0 436 476 Power Transfer Unit 0 00040 476 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 50 Preparation for Jacking 000 397 Pretensioners Seat Belts rm eb ew ea doe ore wee 47 Programmable Electronic Features 230 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry 00 20 Radial Ply Tires sacks aod ahead aang 349 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 442 Radio Broadcast Signals 04 233 Radio Navigation 0 00 00 0 00a ee 266 Radio Operation 00 235 267 284 Radio Remote Controls 0005 282 Radio Satellite 234 235 266 267 271 276 Radio Sound Systems 234 266 Rear Camera cess etia odana ia eee 92 10 512 INDEX EN Rear Cup Hold r escis m de e ede 178 Rear Liftgate o us dos aues ye ee ERU RR ees x 38 Rear Seat Folding isse 134 141 Rear Washer Fluid lees 194 Rear Wheel Bearings 0000050 451 Rear Window Defroster lise 195 Rear Window Features llle 193 Rear Wiper Washer lesse 193 Rearview Mirrors llle 88 Reception Radio 2 6 e xe s 233 Reclining Front Seats llle 125 Reclining Rear Seats isses 137 141 Recorder Event Data isyeen erriarena 000008 63 Recreational Towing 00000 392 Reformulated Gasoline
348. p 0000 3157K Rear Turo Signaleer eed eS Teteres 3757A Rear Tail 2 3157K Backup Light sensa riora aay ea akae a E 3157K License Light 2 4 3a arp hart ting eai 168 406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN BULB REPLACEMENT Low Beam Headlight High Beam Headlight Front Turn Signal Park Light Side Marker Light 1 Open the hood NOTE It may be necessary to remove the air cleaner filter housing and position the Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM aside to replace certain the lights in the left headlight housing 2 Rotate the applicable bulb and connector assembly 1 4 turn counterclockwise and remove the assembly from the headlight housing 81dd40a9 1 Front Turn Signal Park Light Bulb 2 Side Marker Light Bulb 3 Low Beam Headlight Bulb 4 High Beam Headlight Bulb 3 Disconnect the bulb from the harness connector and then connect the replacement bulb ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 467 CAUTION 2 Rotate the bulb s electrical connector turn counter clockwise and remove it from the fog light housing Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 4 Install the bulb and connector assembly into the headlight housing and rotate it 1 4 turn clockwise to lock it in place Front Fog Light NOTE Turn the steering wheel to
349. peed increases as you move the control to the right from the O Off position There are four blower speeds 2 Temperature Control Turn left for cooler or right for warmer temperature settings 3 Mode Control Turn to select either a primary mode as identified by the symbols on the control or a blend of two of these modes The closer the setting is to a particular symbol the more air distribution you receive from that mode See Note and 4 Electric Rear Window Defroster Control Refer to Rear Window Features in Section 3 for more information 5 AIC Control Press and release to change the current setting The indicator illuminates when ON See Note en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289 6 Recirculation Mode Control Press and release to change the current setting The indicator illuminates when ON Note The A C compressor operates in Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes even if the A C control is not pressed This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary Note The A C will engage automatically to prevent fogging when the Recirculation button is pressed and the Mode control is set to Panel or Panel Floor The A C can be deselected manually without disturbing the Mode control selection Note For maximum cooling use A C and recirculation at the same time If economy mode is desired turn OFF the A C and turn the Temperature
350. peration by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses the factory mated Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter with integrated key and Wireless Igni tion Node WIN to prevent unauthorized vehicle opera tion Therefore only RKE transmitters that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will not allow the engine to crank if an invalid RKE transmitter is used to operate the ignition switch After turning the ignition switch to the ON position the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN indicates that there is a problem with the electronics This condition will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds it indicates that there is a fault in the electron ics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible NOTE e TheSentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible with aftermarket remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection e Exxon Mobil Speedpass additional RKE transmit ters or any other transponder
351. quire more frequent coolant changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of coolant and to ensure that coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 443 The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any Disposal of Used Coolant accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by animals or children The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the caution Never add coolant when the engine is ground If ingested by a child contact a physician overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to Coolant Level Four Cylinder Engines the coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine idling and warm to Do not use a pressure cap other than the one normal operating temperature the level of the coolant in specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en the bottle should be between the ADD and FULL gine dama
352. r rect SAE grade Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Engine Oil 2 7L Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to the engine oil fill cap for cor rect SAE grade Use API Certified SAE 10W 30 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Engine Coolant Engine Oil 3 5L Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to the engine oil fill cap for cor rect SAE grade Oil Filter 2 4L Mopar 04884900AB or equivalent Oil Filter 2 7L Mopar 04884899AB or equivalent Oil Filter 3 5L Mopar 04884899AB or equivalent Spark Plugs 2 4L ZFR5F 11 Gap 044 in 1 12 mm ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 475 Component Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts Spark Plugs 2 7L TE10MCC5 Gap 050 in 1 27 mm Spark Plugs 3 5L ZFR5LP 13G Gap 050 in 1 27 mm Fuel Selection 2 4L 87 Octane Fuel Selection 2 7L 87 Octane Fuel Selection 2 7L EXCEPT CALI 5 sc Ethanol FORNIA EMISSION STATES amo Fuel Selection 3 5L 87 to 89 Octane 476 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN Chassis Component Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts Automatic Transaxle Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Power Transfer Unit PTU Mopar Gear Lubricant 75W 90 or equivalent Rear Drive Assembly RDA Mopar Gear Lubricant 75W 90 or equivalent Mopar DOT 3 SAE J1703 or equivalent should be used If DOT 3 brake Brake Master Cylinder fl
353. r Power 1 0 0 0c ees 176 Jack Locations s exer sae shee a ede Rh 396 Jack Operation oer Re RR aed 396 401 Jacking Instructions lille esee 401 Jump Starting oes 408 0 uses ew Pawel es etes 407 Key Programming lt c 9 ls es ade bean eae ees 17 Key Replacement llle 16 Key Sentry Immobilizer 0 15 Key In Reminder secossa sires ipa adist apa k 15 Keyless Entry Systems i so sinne gai miscias E 20 KOyS uia gctesses ced runa ee e ae ooa 12 Knee Bolster ieu cde e REA en 50 Lane Change and Turn Signals 149 Lap Shoulder Belts llle 41 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren 71 73 en INDEX 507 batch Plate o sce ee e s rore Rega p es 42 batches asain hoo aie es duct Maas ix Hole sax dae ane ae 81 Hood paca eee engeren band ah es denis 144 Lead Free Gasoline 0 000000 eee 368 Leaks FIG 1 avec sci an CRURA Rd 81 Life Of Tires cv e mE tu e a RR ewe 352 nego c PET 38 Liftgate Window Wiper Washer 193 Light Bulbs 5 ues SER ta 81 465 Light Replacement kasd ee e oes 466 Lights 5 cs pere ores deb ee tn e d ES 81 146 466 Airbag 323494 PEE Re bers 57 63 80 218 Anti Lock 2 2 kr e re en 329 Anti Lock Warning ssl 215 Automatic Headlights 147 Back Upea secant od date 3 ood ene dels 468 Battery Saver eee 152 Brake Assist Warning 216 334 Brake Warning 0 0 000 c
354. r in the display of certain radios en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to the phonebook is recom mended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry e When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the voice recognition and it is recommended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob e When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Pager This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry if desired When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The UConnect system will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language Phonebook Download UConnect allows the user to download entries from their phone via Bluetooth To use this feature press the PHONE button and say Phonebook Download The system prompts Ready to accept V card entry via Bluetooth The system is now ready to
355. r to Advanced Phone Connectivity in this section 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MM Dial by Saying a Number Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial The system will prompt you to say the number you want to call For example you can say 234 567 8901 The phone number that you enter must be of valid length and combination Based on the country in which the ve hicle was purchased the UConnect system limits the user from dialing an invalid combination of numbers For example in the U S 234 567 890 is nine digits long which is not a valid U S phone number the closest valid phone number has 10 digits The UConnect system will confirm the phone num ber and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Call by Saying a Name Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the UConnect phonebook To learn how to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook in this section The UConnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appea
356. r to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 WMA player cassette player or microphone and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function EJECT Button Auxiliary Mode No function A TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press the TIME button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds RW FF Auxiliary Mode No function SET Button Auxiliary Mode No function en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253 Operating Instructions Voice Recognition Dolby System VR If Equipped Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories For the radio refer to Voice Recognition System VR in Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Section 3 Dolby Laboratories For UConnect Voice Recognition System VR referto Macrovision Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 This product incorporates copyright protection technol ogy that is protected by U S patents and other intellec tua
357. rage ms Center Console Cubby Bin Center Stack Cubby Bin 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Flip n Stow Front Passenger Seat Storage If Equipped The seat latch release loop is located in the center of the seat cushion between the seat cushion and the seatback Pull the loop upward to release the latch and then forward to open the seat to the detent position Center Console Storage Bin NOTE The sliding armrest if so equipped must be in the rearward position in order to access the release button on the front of the bin door Front Passenger Seat Storage Compartment en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 NOTE Make sure that objects inside the bin do not interfere with the latch before closing the seat Push the seat cushion downward after closing it to make sure it latches to the base WARNING Be certain that the seat cushion is locked securely into position before using the seat Otherwise the seat will not provide the proper stability for passen gers An improperly latched seat cushion could cause serious injury Second Row Passenger Seat Temporary Storage Bin This is a temporary storage bin designed for use when the 2096 seatback armrest is down Be sure to remove all items from this bin before raising the 20 seatback mm armrest Armrest Cubby Bin 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE SSS Second Row Map Pocket and Grocery In Floor
358. ransmitters with integrated keys you can program new transmitters to the system by performing the following steps 1 Insert the first valid integrated key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch to the ON position for at least three seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first key 2 Insert the second valid integrated key and turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 15 seconds After 10 seconds a chime will sound and the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the second key 3 Insert a blank integrated key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound and the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing turn on again for three seconds and then turn off 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee The new integrated key is programmed The RKE trans mitter will also be programmed during this procedure Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter with inte grated key contact your authorized dealer for details NOTE Ifa programmed key is lost see your authorized dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys tem s memory This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle The remaining keys must then be reprogrammed
359. rature below 80 F 27 C 7 Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated Then remove dipstick and note the reading a If the fluid is hot the reading should be in the crosshatched area marked HOT between the upper two holes in the dipstick b If the fluid is cold the fluid level should be between the lower two holes in the area marked COLD If the fluid level is low add sufficient fluid through the filler dipstick tube to bring it to the proper level Do not overfill CAUTION e Using a transmission fluid other than the manu facturer s recommended fluid may cause deterio ration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than that recommended by the manufacturer will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts for the correct fluid type Dirt and water in the transaxle can cause serious damage To prevent dirt and water from entering the transaxle after checking or replenishing fluid make certain that the dipstick cap is re seated properly ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 451 Fluid and Filter Changes Change the automatic transaxle fluid and filter at the intervals shown in the Maintenance Schedule in this manual In addition change the fluid and filter if the transaxle is disassembled for any reason Selection of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
360. re Monitoring Telltale light will no longer flash and the CHECK TPM SYS TEM message will no longer display and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPMS sensors NOTE 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle the TPMS Telltale EN STARTING AND OPERATING 363 light will remain on and a chime will sound In addition the graphic in the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPMS Telltale light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound th
361. ribution Two and Three Zone Automatic Temperature Control ATC Systems If Equipped 81d198cc Two Zone ATC 1 ATC ON OFF Button Press and release to change the current setting UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293 2 Left Front Temperature Control Provides left front seat occupant with independent tem perature control Turn left for cooler or right for warmer temperature settings 3 Display Screen Shows the current blower speed mode and temperature settings and it will display an indicator when Recircula tion mode is ON and when the A C is ON 4 Right Front Temperature Control Provides right front seat occupant with independent temperature control Turn left for cooler or right for warmer temperature settings 5 A C Button Press and release to change the current setting 6 Recirculation Mode Button Press and release to change the current setting See Note 294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 7 Mode Button Press the DOWN or UP arrow to change the mode of air distribution to Floor Panel Bi Level or Mix 8 Electric Rear Window Defroster Button Refer to Rear Window Features in Section 3 for more information 9 Defrost Mode Button Press and release to select The indicator illuminates when ON 10 Front Blower Button Press the DOWN arrow to decrease or the UP arrow to increase blower speed 11 AUTO Button Controls airflow temperature distribution volume and the amoun
362. rized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized selling dealer They know you and the vehicle best and are most concerned that you get prompt and 488 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M high quality service The manufacturer s authorized deal ers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the Manufacturer s Cus tomer Center Any communication to the Manufacturer s Customer Center should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Winds
363. ronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the On Volume control knob to the right increases the vol ume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255 to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM or FM frequencies pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time Voice Recognition System Radio If Equipped Refer to Voice Recognition System VR in Section 3 Voice Recognition Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hands Free Phone UConnect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect9 in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UConnect message will display on the radio screen Phone Button UConnect Hands Fre
364. ropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits e Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it e Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer s directions e When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury LATCH Child Seat Anchor System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren Your vehicle s second row passenger seats are equipped with the child restraint anchor system called LATCH The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchors and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now avail able However because the lower anchors are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchors will continue to have features for installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE connection to the top tether anchors hav
365. rough an automated system such compromised with the convertible top down as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Far End Audio Performance e Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is e Audio quality is maximized under not in motion is recommended A e low to medium blower setting e It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the UConnect phonebook low to medium vehicle speed low road noise e The UConnect phonebook nametag recognition rate lic Es is optimized for the person who stored the name in the phonebook smooth road surface fully closed windows 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e dry weather conditions and e operation from the driver s seat e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the UConnect system e Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e Ina convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Bluetooth Communication Link Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to the UConnect system When this happens the connec tion can generally be re established by switching the phone off on Your cell phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON
366. rs from swaying Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESP System will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking tongue weight recommendations Refer to Ve sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds hicle Loading and Trailer Towing in this sec will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the tion for more information before towing a trailer maneuver that caused the ESP activation with your vehicle Trailer Sway Control TSC If TSC activates while towing a trailer stop the TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces vehicle at the nearest safe location and adjust the sively swaying trailer TSC activates automatically once trailer load to eliminate the trailer sway the excessively swaying trailer is recognized When TSC Failure to follow these warnings can result in an is functioning the ESP TCS Indicator Light will flash accident or serious personal injury the engine power will be reduced and you will feel the brake being applied to individual wheels in an attempt to stop the trailer from swaying 336 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability i
367. rtified 5 5 qts 521 Cooling System 2 4 Liter Engine and Single or Dual Zone Climate Control System 7 9 qts 7 51 Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equiva lent 2 4 Liter Engine and Three Zone Climate Control System Mopar 9 8 qts 9 31 Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 473 Component U S Metric 24 Liter Engine and Single or Dual Zone Climate Control System 9 8 qts 9 31 Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equiva lent 24 Liter Engine and Three Zone Climate Control System Mopar 12 qts 1141 Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 3 5 Liter Engine and Single or Dual Zone Climate Control System 9 8 qts 9 31 Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equiva lent 3 5 Liter Engine and Three Zone Climate Control System Mopar 12 qts 1141 Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent ncludes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level 474 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Engine Oil 2 4L Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to the engine oil fill cap for co
368. rtion of the brake system acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or is not functioning and that service is required However steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition h i nal brak ill of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded the conventional brake system wil continue to operate normally if the Brake System Warning Light is not on The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those re sulting from excessive speed in turns following another n vehicle too closely or hydroplaning Only a safe atten If the ABS Light is on the brake system should be tive and skillful driver can prevent accidents serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never Anti Lock brakes If the ABS Light does not come on be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the light repaired as soon as possible 330 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN If both the Brake System Warning Light and the ABS Light remain on the ABS and Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD systems are not functioning Immedi ate repair to the ABS system is required Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by se
369. s Pull upward on the lever to fold or unfold the seat dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked Power Seat If Equipped The power seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat near the floor Use this switch to move the seat up down forward rearward or to tilt the seat Seatback Release 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Power Seat Switch CAUTION Do not place any article under any seat as it may cause damage to the seat controls WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be adjusted properly and you could be injured Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked Head Restraints Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in the event of impact from the rear Front Seats Adjust the head restraints so that the upper edge is as high as practical The left sleeve that the head restraint post slides through contains a lock release button You can raise the head restraint without pressing this button However you must press this button to lower the head restraint 81d019d0 Adjustable Head Restraint To remove the head restraint you must press the lock release button on the left sleeve and the right sleeve simultaneously To reinstall the head restraint in
370. s 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Tongue Weight TW Tongue weight TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 379 Frontal Area Frontal area is the maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control Electronic Refer to TSC Trailer Sway Control under Electronic Brake Control System in this section for information on this system Trailer Sway Control Mechanical The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it w
371. s turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and ignition powered power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is pro grammable Refer to Key Off Power Delay under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Don t leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Key In Ignition Reminder If you open the driver s door and the key is in the ignition a chime will sound to remind you to remove the key NOTE The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC position SENTRY KEY IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unautho rized vehicle o
372. s Calibration 219 228 Compass Variance 0000000 219 229 Computer Trip Travel 00 226 Connector UGI s dso a eeeae gh nem et hb ethene 278 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 278 Conserving Fuel a 2 43006 eta E ane ca ae 226 Console Floor 0 0 0 0 0 eee eee 183 10 500 INDEX MM Console Overhead leeren 162 Contract Service een 489 Converter Catalytic scai aseesimee sines gs na 429 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 442 Gooler Beverage gesses Geeta RR UR xs 180 Cooling System x scvesus em uer REP 440 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 442 Coolant Capacity isse ge ER 472 Coolant Level llle 440 443 Disposal of Used Coolant 443 Drain Flush and Refill 441 Inspectiom oues D dd Re Re 443 Points to Remember 0000 444 Pressure Cap sese udin Us EEG RI 442 Radiator Cap 1 6 eee 442 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 441 472 474 Temperature Gauge llli 205 Corrosion Protection 0 00000 e eee 452 Cruise Control Speed Control 159 Criis Light ise Mee XU ees 212 Cup Holder 3 ica eer n nas 178 457 Customer Assistance sls 487 Customer Programmable Features 230 Data Recorder Event llle 63 Daytime Brightness Interior Lights 153 Daytime Running Lights
373. s allows uploads of music and photos from CDs or through the USB port The Gracenote database finds the artist track and title for the music An auxiliary input jack permits passengers to listen to a portable MP3 player through the vehicle s speakers For vehicles equipped with the Video Entertainment System VES separate audio outputs allow passengers to listen to the vehicle speakers while different audio tracks play through the system s wireless headphones This means rear seat passengers can watch a DVD on the optional rear seat entertainment system while the driver and front seat passenger listen to the radio Other special features include music type selections traffic messaging optional easy store presets parental lockout for VES if equipped and a backup camera display for vehicles equipped with a backup camera Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Clock Setting Procedure The GPS receiver in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellites The satellites clock is Greenwich Mean Time GMT This is the worldwide standard for time This makes the sys tem s c
374. s displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary Tune Scroll control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob and BASS will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257 Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob ag
375. s vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol based coolants Use of propylene glycol based coolants is not recommended 442 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals This coolant can be used up to five years or 100 000 mi 160 000 km before replacement To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period it is important that you use the same coolant throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT coolant When adding coolant e The manufacturer recommends using Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology e Mixa minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant and distilled water Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated e Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the engine coolant and will re
376. s when you turn OFF the headlights Only the headlights will illuminate during this time 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M If you turn the headlights or parking lights or ignition switch ON again the system will cancel the delay If you turn the headlights OFF before the ignition they will turn off in the normal manner The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles equipped with the EVIC Refer to Headlight Off Delay under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 Daytime Running Lights DRL If Equipped The high beam headlights will turn on as Daytime Running Lights DRL and operate at DRL lower inten sity whenever the ignition is ON the engine is running the HEADLIGHT switch is off the parking brake is off the turn signal is off and the shift lever is in any position except PARK NOTE The Daytime Running Lights will turn off automatically when the turn signal is in operation and turn on again when the turn signal is not operating Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned to the LOCK position a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened Fog Lights If Equipped O To activate the front fog lights turn ON the parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull out on the end of the multifunction lever ee UNDERSTAND
377. s will remain off when the doors are open 81c0cc65 Windshield Wiper Washer Lever 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ge Rotate the end of the lever to the first detent past the intermittent settings for low speed wiper operation or to the second detent past the intermittent settings for high e Turn the windshield wipers OFF when driving speed wiper operation through an automatic car wash Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any position other than OFF In cold weather always turn OFF the WIPER switch and allow the wipers to return to the park position before turning OFF the engine If the WIPER switch is left ON and the wipers freeze to the windshield damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted NOTE The wipers will automatically return to the park position if you turn OFF the ignition switch while they are operating The wipers will resume operation when you turn the ignition switch to the ON position again Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the park position If the windshield wiper control is turned OFF and the blades cannot return to the park position damage to the wiper motor may occur ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper system when weather condi tions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause betw
378. se debris or panic stops You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into Anti lock e The ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time after the stop The clicking sound of solenoid valves Brake pedal pulsations and A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop These are all normal characteristics of ABS STARTING AND OPERATING 329 WARNING All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment accurate signals for the computer that may be susceptible to interference caused by im properly installed or high output radio transmitting Anti Lock Brake Light equipment This interference can cause possible loss of The Anti Lock Brake Light monitors the ABS anti lock braking capability Installation of such equip ere ment should be performed by qualified professionals es The light will turn on when the ignition switch Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their is turned to the ON position and may stay on effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping for as long as four seconds makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on I i your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop If the ABS Light remains on or comes on while driving it The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from indicates that the Anti Lock po
379. se precautions will avoid possible hard starting and or significant deterioration in driveability during warm up NOTE Use seasonally adjusted E 85 fuel ASTM D5798 With non seasonally adjusted E 85 fuel you may experience hard starting and rough idle following start up even if the above recommendations are followed especially when the ambient temperature is below 32 F 0 C Engine Block Heater if equipped Block heater usage is beneficial for E 85 startability when the ambient temperature is less than 32 F 0 C SELECTION OF ENGINE OIL FOR FLEXIBLE FUEL VEHICLES E 85 AND GASOLINE VEHICLES FFV vehicles operated on E 85 require specially formu lated engine oils These special requirements are included in Mopar engine oils and in equivalent oils meeting Chrysler Specification MS 6395 The manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Material Standard MS 6395 MS 6395 contains additional requirements developed during ex tensive fleet testing to provide additional protection to the manufacturer s engines Use Mopar or an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS 6395 NOTE Your engine oil filler cap also describes the correct engine oil to use ee STARTING AND OPERATING 367 CAUTION STARTING The characteristics of E 85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0 F 18 C In the range of 0 F 18 C to 32 F 0 C you may exp
380. securely in place J acking Instructions Jack Warning Label Spare Tire Retainer 402 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME WARNING 1 Remove the spare tire jack and jack handle from stowage Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent 2 Loosen but do not remove the wheel nuts on the personal injury or damage to your vehicle M t wheel with the flat tire Turn the wheel nuts counter Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of P EE the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle clockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground Blogle the wheel diagonally opposite qheswbes Mo Re raised 3 Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transaxle the flat tire Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly in PARK a manual transaxle in REVERSE Ni ved start r r n the engine wlth the vehicle dh a jack engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground Turn on the Hazard warning flasher
381. sed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner 262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee AM or FM Button Switches the AM or FM radio to the opposite radio mode RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files a
382. sert the posts into the sleeves and push the head restraint down ward until it locks in place Then if desired press the button on the left sleeve and lower the head restraint UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 WARNING e Do not sit in a seat or allow a passenger to sit in a seat without having the head restraint installed and adjusted properly Failure to follow this warn ing may result in personal injury to you or your passenger in the event of an accident Do not leave a head restraint that is removed from a seat loose in the vehicle A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle Second Row Passenger Seats These head restraints are non adjustable and non removable 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Third Row Passenger Seats Seven Passenger Models These head restraints are non adjustable and non removable However you can fold them forward when they are not in use by passengers Refer to 50 50 Split Third Row Passenger Seats with Fold Flat Feature for operating instructions WARNING Do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat without having the head restraint unfolded and locked in place Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury to the passenger in the event of an accident Heated Seats If Equipped Heated seats provide comfort and warmth on cold days and can help soothe
383. straint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with either an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR or a cinching latch plate or both Both types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR will make a ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor For additional information on ALR refer to Automatic Locking Mode in this section To install a child restraint first pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it through the belt path of the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Next extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor Finally pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasion ally and pull it tight if necessary To attach a child restraint tether strap Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat preferably between the head restraint posts underneath the
384. sunroof Switch en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 Opening Sunroof Manually WARNING Press and hold the switch in the rearward position Release the switch when the sunroof is in the position desired and it will stop moving If you continue to hold the switch in the rearward position the sunroof will open fully and then stop automatically Release the switch once the sunroof stops moving e Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death Opening Sunroof Express In an accident there is a greater risk of being Press the switch rearward and release and the sunroof thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You will open automatically from any position The sunroof could also be seriously injured or killed Always will open fully and then stop automatically This is called fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all Express Open During Express Open operation any passengers are also properly secured movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Do not allow small children to operate the sun Closing Sunroof Manually roof Never allow fingers or other body parts or Press and hold the switch in the forward position any object to project through the sunroof opening Release the switch when the su
385. t The Gracenote database finds the artist track and title for the music en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 An auxiliary input jack permits passengers to listen to a portable MP3 player through the vehicle s speakers For vehicles equipped with the Video Entertainment System VES separate audio outputs allow passengers to listen to the vehicle speakers while different audio tracks play through the system s wireless headphones This means rear seat passengers can watch a DVD on the optional rear seat entertainment system while the driver and front seat passenger listen to the radio Other special features include direct tune music type selections easy store presets backup camera display for vehicles equipped with a backup camera and on some models a dual display screen operation Refer to your radio specific user s manual for detailed operating in structions Operating Instructions Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to your radio specific user s manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped For the radio refer to Voice Recognition System VR in Section 3 For Hands Free Phone Communication UConnect Voice Recognition System VR refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect9 in Section 3 Operating Instructions Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect9 in Sectio
386. t may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you train 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE e Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming section e After training a HomeLink channel if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the ga rage door opener was manufactured after 1995 the garage door opener may have a rolling code If so proceed to the heading Programming A Rolling Code System 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and observe the indicator light If the indicator light stays on constantly programming is complete and the garage door or device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with program ming for a Rolling Code 5 PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the Learn or Training button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor it is NOT the button normally used to open and close the door UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 7 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the device is
387. t of air recirculation automatically Press and release to select Refer to Automatic Operation Two and Three Zone ATC for more information Note To prevent window fogging Recirculation Mode will not operate when either Defrost or Mix mode is selected Doing so will cause the indicator to blink and then turn OFF 81f4d61d 1 ATC ON OFF Button Press and release to change the current setting en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295 2 Left Front Temperature Control Provides left front seat occupant with independent tem perature control Turn left for cooler or right for warmer temperature settings 3 Display Screen Shows the current blower speed mode and temperature settings and it will display an indicator when the A C is ON 4 Right Front Temperature Control Provides right front seat occupant with independent temperature control Turn left for cooler or right for warmer temperature settings 5 AIC Button Press and release to change the current setting 6 AUTO Button Controls airflow temperature distribution volume and the amount of air recirculation automatically Press and release to select Refer to Automatic Operation Two and Three Zone ATC for more information 7 Mode Button Press the DOWN or UP arrow to change the mode of air distribution to Floor Panel Bi Level or Mix 8 Recirculation Mode Button Press and release to change the current setting The indicator illum
388. te Radio 267 Operating Instructions Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped 267 Clock Setting Procedure 267 H Satellite Radio If Equipped REN REQ RER RES REU Radios Only 271 System Activation 0000 271 Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 00005 271 Selecting Satellite Mode 272 Satellite Antenna 2 0 0 0 000000 272 Reception Quality 0 00 273 Operating Instructions Satellite Mode 273 Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped 0 0 0 0 eee 276 Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped H Sirius Backseat TV If Equipped ll Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped 3ueces e Rd eva eeu eI 276 lll Universal Consumer Interface UCI If Equipped 534r Ree ERIT 278 Connecting The iPod Device 278 Controlling The iPod Using Radio Buttons 278 Play Mode 2i ges e erue ehe 279 List Or Browse Mode sss 280 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee lll Remote Sound System Controls If Equipped 282 Right Hand Switch Functions 283 Left Hand Switch Functions For Radio Operation a seses epe
389. tem When calling a number with your UConnect system that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can press the Voice Recognition button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 ff you can press the Voice Recognition button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service cen ter menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored UConnect phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the Voice Recognition button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The UConnect system will then 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone network configurations this is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Recognition button can be used when you wis
390. that may cause heat damage or mechanical wear Ensure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or collapsed Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou plings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present Components should be replaced immediately if there is any evidence of wear or damage that could cause failure 446 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Fuel System The Electronic Fuel Injection high pressure fuel system s hoses and fittings have unique material characteristics that provide adequate sealing and resist attack by dete riorated gasoline You are urged to use only the manufacturer s specified hoses and fittings or their equivalent in material and specification in any fuel system servicing It is manda tory to replace any damaged hoses or fittings that have been removed during service Care should be taken with installing fittings to ensure they are properly installed and fully connected See your authorized dealer for service Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Suggested service intervals can be found in the Mainte nance Schedule in Section 8 WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You wouldn t have your full
391. the disc Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF SEEK Button CD MODE Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in CD MP3 MWA modes SCAN Button CD MODE Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing TIME Button CD MODE Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF CD MODE Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Rewind button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button CD MODE Switches the radio to the Radio mode en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249 Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files The radio can play MP3 WMA files however acceptable MP3 WMA file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 WMA files pay attention to the following restrictions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 WMA file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 WMA DVD Video DVD R
392. the list is done by turning the Tune Scroll control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the Tune Scroll control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down 266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL BENE TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press th
393. to function automatically 72 F 22 C is the recommended setting for maximum comfort for the average person however this may vary NOTE e The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime without affecting automatic operation e Pressing the A C button or adjusting the blower speed or changing the mode of air distribution while in AUTO mode will cancel automatic operation Automatic Operation Rear Zone ATC 1 Press the REAR button on the Three Zone ATC in the instrument panel to turn ON the Rear Zone ATC in the overhead console 2 Turn the Rear Blower control on the Rear Zone ATC in the overhead console to the AUTO position 3 Turn the Rear Temperature control on the Rear Zone ATC in the overhead console to dial in the temperature that you want the system to maintain in the rear cabin NOTE e The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime without affecting automatic operation 300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEM Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather condi tions Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating Refer to Cooling System under Maintenance Procedures and to Fluids Lubri cants and Genuine Parts in Section 7 for information pertaining to
394. uage effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitles If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle Off or On Audio DRC If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio dynamic range The default is set to High and under this setting dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the setting is Normal Aspect Ratio If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide screen pan scan and letter box AutoPlay If Equipped When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted it will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the movie In some rare cases the DVD player may not auto play the main title In such cases use the MENU button on the remote control to select desired title to play NOTE The user will have to set these defaults before loading a disc If changes are made to these settings after 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEM a disc is loaded changes will not be effective Also the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the customer preferred settings AM and FM Buttons Press the buttons to select AM or FM Modes SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station th
395. uid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recommended brake fluids P 2 Mopar Power Steering Fluid 4 Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission ower Steering Reservoir Fluid MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS i Emissions Control System Maintenance 478 Required Maintenance Intervals Bl Maintenance Schedule lesus 478 7 2 Tun 1 Eoi Ee E717 mMo2Zzr2zamazZz rez M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 478 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MM EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure the continued proper functioning of the Emissions Con trol System These and all other maintenance services included in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part that has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The oil change
396. uilt in storage bin e Atri fold door built into the load floor that allows easy access to items in the built in storage bin e 60 40 split second row passenger seats with fold flat feature which allows for extended cargo space Refer to Seats in this section e An optional front passenger seat with fold flat feature which extends cargo space even further Refer to Seats in this section e Cargo tie downs ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 e A retractable cargo area cover if equipped Seven Passenger System Features e A large built in storage bin with a hinged hardcover located in the floor behind the third row passenger seats e 60 40 split second row passenger seats with fold flat feature which allows for extended cargo space Refer to Seats in this section e 50 50 split third row passenger seats with fold flat feature which allows for extended cargo space Refer to Seats in this section e An optional front passenger seat with fold flat feature which extends cargo space even further Refer to Seats in this section e Cargo tie downs Cargo Tie Downs Cargo tie downs are located on both rear trim panels These tie downs should be used to secure loads safely when the vehicle is moving Cargo Tie Downs 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible e Cargo
397. uired AUTOSTICK IF EQUIPPED AutoStick is a driver interactive transaxle that offers six manual ratio changes to provide you with more control of the vehicle AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving trailer towing and many other situations 318 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN AutoStick Operation By placing the shift lever one shift level below the DRIVE position it can be moved from side to side This allows the driver to select a higher or lower range of gears Moving the shift lever to the Left triggers a downshift and to the Right 4 an upshift The gear position will display in the instrument cluster on the transaxle range indicator NOTE In Autostick mode the transaxle will only shift up or down when the driver moves the shift lever to the Right or Left AutoStick is deactivated when the shift lever is moved out of the AutoStick position AutoStick General Information e You can start out in 1st or 2nd gear The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed If a ratio other than 1st is selected and the vehicle is brought to a stop the transaxle control logic will automatically select the 1st gear ratio e Starting out in 2nd gear is helpfu
398. uirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added to Engine Oil The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental addi tives 428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer s engines have a full flow type dispos able oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service Mopar Engine Oil Filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended Drive Belts Check Condition and Tension Belt tension is controlled by means of an automatic tensioner Therefore no belt tension adjustments are required However belt and belt tensioner condition should be inspecte
399. ult ESPOFF ESP in partial off mode NoFUSE IOD fuse out HotOIL 2 4L engine oil temp too hot or CHANgE OIL will display in the odometer NOTE If the instrument cluster is equipped with the optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC then most warnings will display in the EVIC See page 221 for more information Hot Oil 2 4L Engine Refer to Engine Oil Overheating 2 4L Engine Only under If Your Engine Overheats in Section 6 Fuel Cap Fault Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged the word gASCAP will display in the odometer If this occurs tighten the fuel filler cap until a clicking sound is heard Then press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee off the message If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the MIL See page 421 for more information Change Oil Message Base And Mid Line Clusters Only Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The CHANgE OIL message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine
400. until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The UConnect system will call the last number that was dialed from your cellular phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the UConnect system Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the UConnect system after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality avail able on the vehicle can be any one of three types ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the UConnect system either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the UConnect system and transfer of the call to the mobile phone e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the UConnect system for a certain dura tion after which the call is automatically transferred from the UConnect system to the mobile phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF UConnect System Features Language Selection To change the language that the UConnect system is using e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais
401. upplemental front seat mounted side airbags are marked with an SRS label sewn into the outboard side of the seat D Seat Mounted Side Airbag Label 81ddd8b6 EE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 WARNING Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the side curtain airbag The area where the side curtain airbag is located should remain free from any obstructions Do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments bolts or screws for installation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the supplemental front seat mounted side airbags the performance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury Do not attach cupholders or any other objects on or around the door The inflating supplemental front seat mounted side airbags could drive the object into occupants causing serious injury NOTE Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat hooks in this vehicle A clothing bar will impede the proper performance of the curtain airbags Along with the seat belts front airbags work with the instrument panel knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side curtain and seat airbags
402. upplemental side curtain airbags and supple mental front seat mounted side airbags also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Airbag System Components The airbag system consists of the following Occupant Restraint Controller ORC Side Remote Pressure and Acceleration Sensors Airbag Warning Light Driver Airbag Front Passenger Airbag Supplemental Side Curtain Airbags Supplemental Front Seat Mounted Side Airbags Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Interconnecting Wiring Seat Belt Reminder Light e Knee Impact Bolsters e Front Acceleration Sensors e Front Seat Belt Retractor Pretensioners e Front Seat Track Position Sensors How the Airbag System Works e The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the airbags to inflate If airbags are required the ORC determines the necessary rate of airbag inflation for that event e The ORC determines if a side impact is severe enough to deploy the supplemental side curtain airbag and supplemental front seat mounted side airbag e The ORC detects rollover en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 e The ORC and other systems monitor the readiness of the electronic components whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON position These include all of the items listed above except the kn
403. urns on it may indi cate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the ABS The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity to a portion of the hydraulic system in the event of a failure Failure of either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake System Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder drops below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers due to a change in fluid level If so the vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked Immediate repair is necessary if brake failure is indicated WARNING Driving a vehicle with the Brake System Warning Light on is dangerous A significant decrease in braking performance or vehicle stability during braking may occur It will take you longer to stop the vehicle or will make your vehicle harder to control You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD Both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light will turn on in the event of an EBD failure Immediate repair of the ABS is required in the event of an EBD failure 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEM The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
404. utton allows you to select between Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B the following items en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259 e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the Tune Scroll control knob to adjust the minutes Press the Tune Scroll control knob again to save changes AM and FM Buttons Press the buttons to select AM or FM modes SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The sta tions stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to th
405. vel before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will give you an incorrect reading Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and only when the engine is hot will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the range markings on the dipstick Either the range mark ings consist of a crosshatch zone marked SAFE or a crosshatch zone marked with MIN at the low end of the range and MAX at the high end of the range Adding 1 0 qt 1 0 1 of oil when the reading is at the low end of the range marking will raise the oil level to the high end of the range marking Engine Oil Dipstick 818168a4 426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Do not overfill the engine Overfilling the engine will cause oil aeration which can lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil temperature This could damage your engine Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for information on this system NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 mi 10 000 km or six months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and
406. versal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original transmitter e Press the Learn button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code e Did you unplug the device for training and remember to plug it back in If you have any problems or require assistance please ge call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the device The term IC before the certification registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifica tions were met POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof switch is located between the sun visors on the overhead console 81d0200c Power
407. voided The highest gear range should be selected that allows for adequate performance For example choose 4 if the desired speed can be maintained Choose 3 or 2 if needed to maintain the desired speed Extended driving at high RPM should be avoided to prevent excess heat generation A reduction in vehicle speed may be required to avoid extended driving at high RPM Return to a higher gear range or vehicle speed when road conditions and RPM level allows 392 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Towing Tips Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transaxle overheating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods put transaxle in NEU TRAL and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily Refer to Cooling System under Maintenance Pro cedures in Section 7 RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground Recreational towing for this vehicle is not recommended NOTE Ifthe vehicle requires towing make sure all four wheels are off the ground WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS Bl Hazard Warning Flasher 394 H if Your Engine Overheats isse 394 Engine Oil Overheating 2 4L Gas And 2 0L Diesel Engines Only If Equipped 395 H Jacking
408. w passengers sitting in the rear passen ger seats To use the interior observation mirror first press on the raised bars on the compartment door and release The door will swing downward Then raise the door until it is almost closed and release The door will latch in position to use the interior observation mirror Power Sunroof Switch If Equipped Refer to Power Sunroof in Section 3 GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle s battery The HomeLink buttons that are located in the sun visor designate the three different HomeLink channels 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by Federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety information or assistance 81cb44fe HomeLink Buttons NOTE HomeLink is disabled when th
409. washer share the same fluid reservoir The reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment Be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water In cold weather always turn OFF the rear wiper switch and allow the rear wiper to return to the park position before turning OFF the engine If the rear wiper switch is left ON and the rear wiper freezes to the window damage to the rear wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the rear wiper blade from returning to the park position If the rear wiper control is turned OFF and the blade cannot return to the park position damage to the rear wiper motor may occur UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195 RES Uer Ree Vind DE The Electric Rear Window Defroster control is CAUTIONI located on the climate control Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside rearview mirrors if equipped An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes For five more minutes of operation press the button again e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a so
410. wing procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Seat Belt Pretensioners The driver and front passenger s seat belts are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove any slack from the seat belt systems in the event of a collision These devices improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight around the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt must still be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the front airbags the pretensioners are single use items After a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners both must be replaced 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s seat belt has not
411. ws closed and the blower fan switched OFF This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only SEATS Manual Front Seat Adjustments Forward and Rearward Adjustment The manual seat adjustment bar is at the front of the seat near the floor Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rearward Release the bar once the seat is in the position desired Then using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be adjusted properly and you could be injured Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked Recliner Adjustment The control lever is on the outboard side of the seat To recline the seat lean forward slightly and lift the lever Manual Seat Adjustment Then lean back to the position desired and release the lever To return the seatback to its normal upright posi tion lean forward and lift the lever Release the lever once the seatback is in the upright position 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN WARNING e Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be adjusted properly and
412. y movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof in certain open or par tially open positions This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition Off Operation For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable Re
413. y System Illuminated 20 Ethanol 5553490 0n i ben iwhdadeda adds 369 Event Data Recorder 00000005 63 Exhaust Gas Caution 39 79 372 439 ExhaustSysteni sentra riran Re 79 439 Express Down Windows sss 25 Exterior Folding Mirrors llle 90 Exterior Light Service 0 000 000 5 466 Exterior Lights 2 0 0 0 cece eee 81 466 LabricCat tae es Soca G ea d 454 455 Filler Location Fuel sosiaa tagina da 0000005 372 en INDEX 503 Filters Air Cleaner lle 429 Air Conditioning sess 301 434 Automatic Transaxle lll 451 Engine Oll i doe eoe tte ROS Scc 428 474 Engine Oil Disposal sess 428 Flashers Hazard Warning secer ei edid 4e ess 394 Turn Signal en oper YES 81 149 207 Flash To Pass llle 150 Flexible Fuel Vehicles sls 364 Cruising Range seces etesen piseag ead es 367 Engine Oil ee kk re Rm Ren 366 Fuel Requirements 0 364 365 Maintenance l l 364 367 Replacement Parts 000 367 Starting i i e rie re E EE A 367 Flooded Engine Starting 310 Floor Console lees 183 Fluid Brake esie RR Ra 476 Fluid Capacities llle 472 Fluid Leaks 2 2 eere emen xy nem 81 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transaxle lt s ease teame caw am 449 Brake aac tae XOU a ER raped d 447 476 Cooling System eee eee 44
414. y covers those subjects that are unique to these vehicles Please refer to the other sections of this manual for information on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and gasoline only powered vehicles 81ae46ab E 85 Fuel Cap CAUTION Only vehicles with the special E 85 fuel filler cap can operate on E 85 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 365 Along with the special E 85 fuel filler cap your vehicle may display a badge which also indicates it can operate on E 85 81ae46a9 E 85 Badge ETHANOL FUEL E 85 E 85 is a mixture of approximately 85 fuel ethanol and 15 unleaded gasoline WARNING Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause serious personal injury Never have any smok ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov ing the fuel filler tube cap gas cap or filling the tank Do not use E 85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame FUEL REQUIREMENTS If your vehicle is E 85 compatible it will operate on unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 or E 85 fuel or any mixture of these two fuels 366 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN For best results a refueling pattern that avoids alternat ing between E 85 and unleaded gasoline is recom mended When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that e you do not add less than 5 gal 19 L when refueling e you drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least 5 miles 8 km Observing the
415. y have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS IF EQUIPPED e The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure e The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 mm psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pres sure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mi 1 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to the Tires General Information in this section for information on 356 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven This is normal and there should be no adjustment for this ceivesthe updated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information increased pressure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warn
416. you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use Seatback Release the recliner only when the vehicle is parked es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 Lumbar Support If Equipped Driver s Seat Height Adjustment If Equipped The control lever is on the outboard side of the seatback The control lever is located on the outboard side of the Turn the control lever downward to increase the lumbar seat Raise the lever to raise the seat Lower the lever to support or upward to decrease the lumbar support as lower the seat The total seat travel is 2 15 in 55 mm desired e eS Seat Height Adjustment Lever Lumbar Control 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat If Equipped This feature allows for extended cargo space When the seat is folded flat it is an extension of the load floor surface allowing long cargo to fit from the rear hatch up to the instrument panel The fold flat seatback also has a hardback surface that you can use as a work surface when the seat is folded flat and the vehicle is not in motion Fold Flat Seat ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving i
417. zone is selected according to the map 5 Press and release the COMPASS TEMPERATURE button to exit Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the transaxle is in PARK Press and release the MENU button until Personal Set tings displays in the EVIC Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following choices LANGUAGE When in this display you may select one of three lan guages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Press the RESET button while in this display to select English French or Spanish Then as you continue the informa tion will display in the selected language NOTE The EVIC will not change the UConnect lan guage selection Refer to Language Selection under Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 AUTO UNLK ON EXIT When ON is selected all doors and the liftgate will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transaxle is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press and release the RESET button until ON or OFF appears en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 RKE UNLOCK When Driver Door 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE UNLOCK button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press the RKE

Ariens 924049 Snow Blower User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents